Loewe Connect 32 User Manual

Loewe Connect 32 User Manual
Connect
TV
36636020
Connect 32
User manual
n Connect 32
User manual
Imprint
Imprint
Loewe Technologies GmbH
Industriestraße 11
D-96317 Kronach
www.loewe.tv
Editorial date 02/16-1.1b TB/PS
© Loewe Technologies GmbH, Kronach
ID: 2.2.13.0
All rights including translation, technical modifications and errors
reserved.
2
„ Connect 32
User manual
Table of contents
Imprint...........................................................................................2
Welcome ........................................................................................5
Scope of delivery .......................................................................................... 5
About this user manual ............................................................................... 5
For your safety..............................................................................6
Remote control button mapping ................................................8
Operating controls on the TV set ...............................................9
Audio/Radio ............................................................................... 61
Audio playback ...........................................................................................62
Radio mode (DVB radio) ...........................................................................64
Radio mode (Internet radio) .....................................................................65
Photo .......................................................................................... 66
Photo display............................................................................................... 67
Web ............................................................................................. 68
MediaNet .....................................................................................................68
Browser........................................................................................................70
Connections rear side of the device ........................................ 10
Preparing the TV set ...................................................................11
Installing the TV set ..................................................................................... 11
Set covers ..................................................................................................... 11
Cable fixing ................................................................................................... 11
Connecting the TV set ................................................................................ 11
Preparing the remote control unit .............................................................12
Switching the TV set ON/OFF ...................................................................13
General information on menu operation ................................. 14
On-screen displays......................................................................17
Explanation of keys......................................................................................17
Explanation of symbols ..............................................................................17
Automatic menu info ..................................................................................17
Permanent clock display ............................................................................17
Operation without remote control ............................................17
Initial installation ....................................................................... 18
Initial installation wizard ..............................................................................18
TV set as a monitor ....................................................................................29
Home view.................................................................................. 30
Home view - Favourites .............................................................................30
Home view - Sources .................................................................................30
TV ................................................................................................. 31
Setting the volume ......................................................................................31
Select station ...............................................................................................31
Status display..............................................................................................33
Function list (TV mode) .............................................................................34
AV list (AV Source) ......................................................................................34
Electronic Programme Guide – EPG........................................................35
Teletext .........................................................................................................38
HbbTV / MediaText....................................................................................40
Picture in Picture (PIP) ................................................................................41
Digital Recorder ..........................................................................................42
TV viewing with time shift .......................................................................42
Archive recording.....................................................................................43
DR+ archive ..............................................................................................45
DR+ Streaming ........................................................................................49
Follow-Me function ..................................................................................49
Timer ............................................................................................................50
System settings ......................................................................... 71
Picture .......................................................................................................... 72
Sound ........................................................................................................... 74
Stations ........................................................................................................ 75
Automatic scan TV+Radio ..................................................................... 76
Manual Scan TV / Radio......................................................................... 77
Station lists TV / Radio ...........................................................................79
Compose / edit Personal list..................................................................80
Update station list automatically ............................................................81
Transfer all station lists .............................................................................81
Control .........................................................................................................82
Language ..................................................................................................83
EPG ............................................................................................................83
Parental lock .............................................................................................84
Energy efficiency......................................................................................85
Quick start mode .....................................................................................85
Software update.......................................................................................86
On-screen displays ...................................................................................91
Time and date ...........................................................................................91
DVB settings .............................................................................................92
PIP ..............................................................................................................92
DR+ ...........................................................................................................93
Standard Teletext.....................................................................................94
HbbTV .......................................................................................................95
Hard disks .................................................................................................95
Export log file ............................................................................................96
WEB key function.....................................................................................96
Multimedia / Network................................................................................ 97
Network settings...................................................................................... 97
Multimedia settings ...............................................................................100
Renderer .................................................................................................100
Connections ...............................................................................................101
Sound components ..............................................................................102
Antenna DVB ..........................................................................................105
AV connection settings .........................................................................105
Digital Link...............................................................................................106
Gaming mode ........................................................................................106
Extras ......................................................................................................... 107
Integrated features ................................................................................108
Reset to factory settings .......................................................................108
Conditional Access module (CA module) ..........................................109
Video ........................................................................................... 54
Video playback............................................................................................55
Additional functions for DR+ archive playback ......................................58
3
„ Connect 32
User manual
Table of contents
External devices ........................................................................ 111
Devices to the HDMI connections............................................................111
Digital Link HD ............................................................................................112
Devices on AV.............................................................................................113
Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) ....................................115
Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier............................................................115
Audio playback from external devices....................................................116
IR-Link .........................................................................................................116
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12)..............................................................116
Setting the remote control ....................................................................... 117
Teaching the remote control .................................................. 118
Troubleshooting .......................................................................120
Technical Data .......................................................................... 122
Signals via AV (PC IN) / HDMI ................................................................ 123
Signal input groups .................................................................................. 123
Accessories ...............................................................................124
Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables ................................................ 124
Mounting options ..................................................................................... 125
VESA standard.......................................................................................... 126
Environment ............................................................................. 127
Legal information ..................................................................... 127
Miscellaneous ........................................................................... 128
CA module error codes ........................................................................... 128
Glossary ....................................................................................129
EC Declaration of Conformity................................................. 132
Index .......................................................................................... 133
Service....................................................................................... 137
Code page .................................................................................138
Notes .........................................................................................140
4
„ Connect 32
User manual
Welcome
Thank you,
About this user manual
for choosing a Loewe product and having placed your trust in us.
For best results regarding safety and the longevity of the set, we
recommend you read the chapter For your safety before switching
the TV set on for the first time.
With Loewe you have not simply decided on a modern and technically
innovative TV set, but for timeless design, sharp picture quality, brilliant
sound for movies and music as well as intuitive operation with the
Loewe remote control unit, smart phone or tablet. In short, Loewe is
perfect for home entertainment – Made in Germany.
We look forward to welcome you as our customer and hope that you
enjoy your Premium Home Entertainment made by Loewe.
Many features, one result:
perfect Home Entertainment.
Just more entertainment.
The Loewe Assist Media user interface is intuitive and
graphically optimised. This is how you quickly find your
desired content – from TV set to online.
In the user guide refer to Home view.
Perfectly networked.
Thanks to its numerous connections, your Loewe TV
becomes your entertainment centre. Connect it to the
Internet, DVD/Blu-ray player, external speakers, etc.
In the user guide refer to Media+
Hard disk for your TV archive.
Record the TV programme on an externally connected hard
disk or pause it and continue watching it at a later date.
With DR+ (Digital Recording), all this is no problem for your
Loewe TV set.
In the user guide refer to Digital Recorder.
Customer
Care
Center
Your contact person.
We are happy to help you with any questions regarding your
TV set and other Loewe products.
In the user guide refer to Service.
The chapter glossary gives explanations of certain terms used in the
TV set and the user manual.
indicate important
Paragraphs which begin with the symbol
instructions, tips or conditions for the following settings.
Terms which you will find in the menus or printed on the remote control
or TV set are written in bold type.
The necessary control elements are shown in the descriptions to the
left of the text containing the instructions for action.
Depending on the connected accessory equipment the menus in the
TV set can differ from those described here.
All the station names, programme contents, the illustrated photos,
titles, albums and album covers in this user manual are examples.
In addition to the remote control, a PC keyboard can be connected to
one of the USB ports on your TV and then used to control your TV set.
In the user manual, this symbol indicates places in
which the use of a keyboard is particularly advantageous.
The user guide and the user manual for your TV set are updated at
irregular intervals. We recommend an occasional examination on the
Support Portal of the Loewe homepage.
General information on the operation of the
TV set
For further information on the user interface and the general operation
of your TV set see chapter General information on the operation.
Interactive data services
In some countries the stations also broadcast interactive data services
with their programmes, leading to the functions of individual keys not
being available or only so to a limited extent. You can find out more
about this in chapter TV, section HbbTV / MediaText.
Important information
Scope of delivery
‚ LCD TV set
‚ Mains cable
‚ Antenna cable
Loewe does not accept any liability for the nature and content of
receivable Internet services. This also applies to the Loewe MediaNet
portal. With its devices, Loewe provides the technical platform that
fundamentally enables such material to be received. Loewe cannot
make any guarantees regarding changes in scope and content,
particularly with regard to the future and after going to press. The
receivable online services are not included in the delivery and can vary
depending on the product and country.
‚ Remote control Assist with two batteries
‚ Attache-câble à velcro
‚ User guide
‚ Installation instructions for the setup solution
‚ Table Stand Connect 32
‚ Tool kit for mounting the set-up solution
5
„ Connect 32
User manual
For your safety
For your safety, and to avoid unnecessary damage to your unit,
please read and follow the safety instructions below:
Intended use and ambient conditions
This TV set is intended exclusively for receiving and playing visual and
audio signals. Your set is designed for operation in dry rooms. It must
not be used in rooms with a high level of humidity (e.g. bathroom,
sauna).
Please be aware that your TV set may react sensitively against dust
and soot particles in the ambient air. Excessive loads of this type may
damage the device or even lead to a malfunction.
Please take care for clean air environment to avoid any damage of your
device.
Soot and dust deposits can accumulate behind the front panel glass
of the LCD TV set without a visible source of soot being present. These
soot and dust deposits are also known as “fogging” or “magic dust”.
There are scattered instances of this phenomenon, but especially
during the warm-up period and after renovation work or in new
constructions. Various factors are mentioned as the cause, see too
the reports on the Internet.
In such cases cleaning or replacement of the panel is excluded from
the guarantee, since it does not involve a set defect, but rather an
external influence.
If the unit is used outdoors, make sure that it is protected from moisture
(rain, dripping water and splashing water or dew). High humidity and
dust concentrations lead to leakage currents in the device. This can
result in a shock hazard when touching it or even fire.
If you have moved the unit out of the cold into a warm environment,
leave it switched off for about an hour to avoid the formation of condensation.
Do not place objects containing liquids on top of
the unit. Protect the appliance against dripping
and splashing water.
Candles or naked flames must be kept away from
the TV set at all times to prevent it from catching
fire.
Never place the TV set in a location where it is
exposed to vibrations. This may lead to damage.
Transporting
Move the device in vertical position only. Get hold of the device on the
upper and lower edges of the housing.
Do not stand it up on the bottom edge, so as to reduce the risk of
damage and soiling. If the set has to be put down during packing/
unpacking, place the TV set with its entire front surface lying flat on
soft material. Use a blanket or the fleece from the packing material as
an underlay.
The LCD screen is made of glass or plastic and can break if not handled
properly.
Always wear rubber gloves to carry the TV set if the LCD screen is
damaged and liquid crystal might be leaking out. In the case of skin
contact immediately rinse thoroughly with water.
6
Power supply
Incorrect voltages can damage the unit. This device may only be
connected to a power supply with the voltage and frequency indicated
on the type plate using the supplied mains cable. The mains plug of the
TV set must be easily accessible so that the device can be disconnected
from the mains at any time. When unplugging the unit from the mains,
pull at the connector body and not at the cable. The cables in the mains
plug could otherwise be damaged and could cause a short-circuit when
plugged in again. Lay the mains cable so that it cannot be damaged.
Do not step on the mains cable. The mains cable may not be kinked
or laid over sharp edges nor be exposed to chemicals; the latter also
applies to the unit as a whole. A mains cable with damaged insulation
can cause electric shocks and poses a fire risk.
Air circulation and high temperatures
The vent slots on the rear panel of the set must always be kept
unobstructed. Please do not place newspapers or cloths on/over the
TV set.
Make sure that there is at least 10 cm free space
on the sides and above the set for air circulation,
if the set is placed in a cabinet or on a shelf.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Like any electronic device, your TV set requires
air for cooling. Obstruction of the air circulation
can cause fires.
Prevent metal items, needles, paper clips, liquids, wax, or similar items,
from getting into the interior of the device through the vent slots in the
rear panel. Such objects can cause short circuits in the set, which
could possibly cause a fire.
If something should get into the interior of the set then immediately
unplug the mains plug of the device and contact the field service for
more information.
About the LCD screen
The TV set with LCD screen you have purchased satisfies the most
rigorous quality requirements and has been inspected with respect
to pixel errors. Despite of thorough care when manufacturing the
display, it cannot be 100% guaranteed that no subpixel defects will
occur due to technical reasons. Please understand that these types
of effects, as long as they are within the limits specified in the standard,
cannot be considered as a device defect in terms of the guarantee.
Avoid displaying still images for long periods of time. It is possible that
a copy of the image may remain visible.
„ Connect 32
User manual
For your safety
Set-up
Automatic shutdown
Loewe flatscreen TV sets are specified for Loewe accessories. The TV
set is suitable for mounting in many different ways. Note the assembly
instructions regarding the different possible mounting options.
If the TV is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume, programme
change, etc.) the TV will automatically switch to stand-by mode to save
energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process appears one
minute before expiry of the 4 hours.
When using accessories from other manufacturers take care that the
TV set can be easily inclined or rotated on the respective mounting
option.
For mounting options from other manufacturers with motor drive,
make sure that the TV set cannot be rotated manually. The use of
mounting options from other manufacturers with locks in certain
positions is generally discouraged.
When rotating the TV set it is essential to
ensure that the pressure exerted on the device
frame is not too large. Especially in case of
large-format displays there is a risk to damage
the screen.
Before setting up the device, please check that the final location is
suitable to bear the load of the device in terms of surface (sensitivity
to pressure) and stability (statics).
This is particularly the case for the high-gloss painted surfaces and
surfaces that are made from real wood / real wood veneer or plastic
surfaces.
The automatic shutdown is active in the energy efficiency mode
Home Mode.
Automatic shutdown does not occur when using the radio without
screen display (screen off).
Cleaning and care
Switch off the TV set with the main switch prior to cleaning.
Clean the TV set, the screen, and the remote control unit with a soft,
moist, clean and colour-neutral cloth only, without any aggressive or
scouring cleaning agents.
Repairs and accessories
Never remove the back of the TV set yourself. Have your TV set
repaired or serviced by authorised television technicians only.
Only use original accessories such as Loewe stands, if possible.
Place the TV set with the table or floor stand only on a level, sturdy,
horizontal base. Particularly ensure that the set does not protrude to
the front when placed in or on pieces of furniture.
Place the TV set in a normal position for use. TV set may only be used
in an upright horizontal position. It may not be tilted by more than 10
degrees. The TV set must never be operated in portrait position, lying
flat or hanging overhead from the ceiling.
D
±10°
Set up the device where it is not exposed to direct insolation and where
it is not exposed to additional heating by radiators.
When using the VESA mounting points, please refer to the information
in chapter Accessories, section VESA standard.
Supervision
Do not let children operate the TV set unsupervised and do not let
them loiter and play close to the set. The set could tip over, be pushed
off or pulled down from the stand surface and injure someone.
Do not allow the switched-on TV set to run unattended.
Volume
Loud music can lead to ear damage. Avoid extreme volume especially
over long periods and when using headphones.
Thunder storms
Pull out the mains plug and all connected antenna cables from the TV
set in a thunderstorm. Overvoltage caused by lightning strokes can
damage the set via the antenna system, as well as via the mains. The
mains plug and all connected antenna cables should also be pulled
out during long periods of absence.
7
„ Connect 32
User manual
Remote control
Remote control button mapping
Depending on the selected operating mode (TV/Video/Audio/Photo/Web) and function (e.g. DR+, EPG, PIP, Teletext, HbbTV, etc.), the key assignment
may differ from the assignment described here (see the corresponding chapter in this user manual).
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Sound mute/on.
2 LED display for currently operated device.
33
32
31
30
3 Call the TV mode.
4 Reassign remote control to SetTop-Box (1 (presetting: Apple TV).
5 Pressing briefly: Open the DR+ archive.
Pressing longer: Call timer list.
6 Add current object to Home favourites.
7 EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) on/off.
8 Teletext/MediaText (3 on/off.
29
9 Pressing briefly: Call function list for the active operating mode.
Pressing longer: Call System settings.
10 V+/V- increase/reduce volume.
11 Pressing briefly: Call station list.
12 Green coloured key: screen on/off in Audio/Radio mode.
8
9
28
27
26
25
24
10
23
15 Pressing briefly: direct recording (with determination of recording duration) (4.
7
Pressing longer: Call expanded station list.
In the menu: confirm/call up.
13 Red coloured key: call preferred value-added network service, if available (3.
14 Pressing briefly: skip backwards.
Pressing longer: winding backwards.
Pressing longer: One Touch Recording (4.
11
22
16 Pause / Start/pause the timeshift television (4.
17 Stop / End timeshift (return to live image) (4.
18 Pressing briefly: skip forwards.
12
13
14
15
16
21
20
19
18
17
Pressing longer: winding forwards.
19 Play / Start/continue timeshift television (4.
20 Blue coloured key: call station function list
(selection of language/sound, subtitles or channel/video track).
21 Pressing briefly: Yellow coloured key: call history.
Pressing longer: Yellow coloured key: call last station.
22 Navigation on the user interface, select objects.
In the menu / lists: select/set.
23 P+/P– next/previous station.
24 Pressing briefly: step / level back.
Pressing long: close all displays.
25 Press briefly during an on-screen display: info display. Info text appropriate to the content
that can assist you further, should you have any questions about your TV set.
Press briefly, without on-screen display: access status display. With status display open and
repeatedly pressing the key call the detailed information on the broadcast.
Press longer: show Explanation of keys.
26 PIP (picture in picture) on/off.
27 Call up the Home view.
28 Call up the AV list.
29 Select stations with numeric buttons directly.
In the menu: enter numbers or letters.
30 Call MediaNet (standard assignment) (2.
31 Reassign remote control to video device (1 (presetting: BluTech Vision 3D).
32 Call radio mode (standard assignment) (1.
33 Switches the TV set on (mains switch must be turned on) or switches to standby mode.
Press longer while TV set is switched on: TV set and all CEC-enabled devices connected
to the HDMI ports will be switched off to standby (System Standby).
(1
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter External devices, section Setting the remote control).
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter System settings, section Control – Web key function).
(3
Depending on the corresponding settings (see chapter System settings, section Control – HbbTV).
(4
Only with externally connected USB hard disk.
(2
8
„ Connect 32
User manual
Operating controls on the TV set
Functions of the operating elements
1 Mains switch:
The mains switch is located on the bottom of the set.
Always return the TV set to Standby mode before switching it off
with the main switch.
2 On/Off key:
Switching on in standby mode.
Switching off to the standby mode.
3 IR receiver:
Infrared receiver for receiving the remote control commands.
4 Display:
white:
Depending on the ambient brightness, the
white LED display is dimmed (1 and lights
up with a different degree of brightness.
5
If the TV set is in quick start mode, the
white LED display is not dimmable and
starts with full brightness.
M
4
8
-
7
+
2
3
TV set in standby.
1
white, intermittent: TV set starts.
green:
TV set switched on.
red:
timer recording active.
blue:
TV set in standby and background operation
active (EPG data updating, software
update).
R
6
5 Key M:
TV set in standby mode: switch TV set on in TV mode.
TV set switched on: call direct control on TV set.
In direct control on TV set: up .
6 Key R:
TV set in standby mode: switch TV set on in radio mode.
TV set switched on: toggle TV mode and radio mode.
Direct control on TV set: down .
7 Key +:
TV set in standby mode: switch TV set on in TV mode.
Increase volume.
Direct control on TV set: to the right .
8 Key – :
TV set in standby mode: switch TV set on in TV mode.
Reduce volume.
Direct control on TV set: to the left .
(1
Automatic dimming depending on the room brightness (OPC) must be activated (see chapter System settings, section Picture).
9
„ Connect 32
User manual
Connections rear side of the device
Position and function of the connections
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
K
1
2
3
1
Slot for Kensington lock
2
AC IN - Mains connection
Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
4
5
6
3
LAN - Network connection
RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet
4
HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1 (with Audio Return Channel)
HDMI type A 1.4b – Digital Video IN (4K@30Hz)/Audio IN/OUT
5
HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2
HDMI type A 1.4b – Digital Video IN (4K@30Hz)/Audio IN
6
ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue / DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C
IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA
7 ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2
F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA
8
9
ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2
F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA
SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)
Cinch socket (orange)
10 USB 3.0 - USB connection
USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)
11 HEADPHONE - Headphone connection
Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm
(1
The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.
10
7
8
9
10
12 HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3
HDMI type A 1.4b– Digital Video IN (4K@30Hz)/Audio IN
13 AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (Jack 3,5 mm)
14 RS-232C - Serial interface (1 – (RJ12)
15 AV - Micro AV socket (1
Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:
Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:
Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)
CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
RGB
L/R
PC/STB video signal
Component (YPbPr)
L/R
16 COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)
17 COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)
18 USB - USB connection
USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)
19 USB - USB connection
USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)
„ Connect 32
User manual
Preparing the TV set
Installing the TV set
Connecting the TV set
Mounting options / Installation notes
Connecting to the mains supply
Mount the supplied mounting option. While doing so, look for the
corresponding directions in the installation instruction.
Remove the cover for the connections.
Your Loewe dealer can assist you in finding other mounting options
that suit your needs.
Choose a place for installing your TV set where no bright light or
sunlight shines directly onto the screen. This could cause reflections
which impair the picture.
Connect the TV set to a 220-240V mains socket:
A cable bushing connects the lateral and posterior terminal region. In
this way you can pass the cables of the lateral connections through
and lay them out together with the rear connecting cables.
3 times the screen diagonal can be taken as a guide value for the
viewing distance (e.g., for a 40-inch set approx. 3 m for SD signal). The
viewing distance can be reduced with an HD/UHD signal.
Set covers
Covers for rear and side connections
In order to remove the rear side cable covers pull them simply from
the device.
To fit the cover, insert the lugs at the top edge of the cover into the
corresponding cut-outs in the rear panel and push up the cover until
it snaps in.
Connecting antennas
The side cover of the TV set can also be completely removed. For this,
open it as far as it will go and gently pull on the open cover.
Plug the cable of antenna, cable TV system or room antenna into the
ANT TV socket.
If you want to use analogue cables / DVB-C connection and a DVB-T
antenna together, use an external antenna switch (available from
your dealer).
Cable (analogue) / DVB-C / DVB-T antenna:
Satellite antenna DVB-S:
Depending on the used satellite system, connect a connecting cable
from the multi-switch or directly from the LNC to the ANT-SAT and
ANT-SAT2 sockets of the TV set respectively.
When connecting the TV set to a single cable community antenna,
connect the ANT-SAT and ANT-SAT2 sockets directly to the
appropriate SAT antenna socket.
When connecting the TV set to a DiSEqC single cable community
antenna (in accordance with EN 50494), connect the ANT-SAT
socket directly to the appropriate SAT antenna socket.
The cover detaches from the holder and gives free access to the
connection area. To replace the cover, simply push it until it latches
back into place.
In case of a DiSEqC one cable communal system you require only
one antenna cable. Further distribution of the signal to the two
reception routes is accomplished by the TV set’s satellite tuner.
A cable bushing connects the lateral and posterior terminal region. In
this way you can pass the cables of the lateral connections through
and lay them out together with the rear connecting cables.
It is possible, however, to continue using an existing SAT cabling
with two antenna cables in a DiSEqC one cable communal system.
If two transmission channels of the DiSEqC single cable community
exist, one system channel is used per satellite antenna cable (see
also chapter Initial installation, section DiSEqC single cable
community antenna).
Cable fixing
Using the Velcro cable tie supplied, you can fix the rear cables.
For the Connect 32 this is done by a fixation at the table stand (see
installation instructions of the table stand).
Ask your dealer in this regard.
Cable
analogue /
DVB-C
R
DVB-T
DVB-S
TV
Connect 32
11
„ Connect 32
User manual
Preparing the TV set
Connecting the TV set to the Home network
Preparing the remote control unit
You may link your TV set to the home network by a wired connection
(Ethernet, Powerline adapters separately available) or by a wireless
radio connection (WLAN). For wireless connections, the TV set has
an internal WLAN antenna.
In order to play back data from your home network your Loewe TV
supports the UPnP AV standard.
For the network adaptor configuration, see chapter System settings,
section Multimedia / Network – Network settings.
Under no circumstances may the TV set be wired and at the
same time connected by a wireless connection to the same
network, e.g. router. This may cause severe operational faults!
Inserting or replacing batteries
Press on the embossed arrow whilst pushing the battery cover down.
Only use leak-proof micro-cells of the LR 03 (AAA) Alkali-Manganese
type. Do not use different types of batteries and old and new batteries
together.
The batteries used must not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunlight, fire or similar!
The position of the batteries is indicated in the battery compartment
(in opposite directions). Pay attention to the correct polarity of +
and – when inserting the batteries.
Example for a wired connection
Connect the LAN socket of your TV set to the LAN switch/router of
your home network with a network cable (available from your dealer).
LAN switch/router
PC
A
AA
03
LR
03
LR
DSL
A
AA
TV set
If the batteries are too weak after longer use, the TV set prompts you to
change the batteries. Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally
friendly way (see chapter Environment / Legal information).
Push the cover back on from below after having inserted the batteries.
Adjusting the remote control for operating the TV set
Example for a wireless connection
Press the TV key.
You can connect the TV set to your home network by a wireless radio
connection via the WLAN antenna inside the set.
See in chapter External devices,section Setting the
remote control how to operate other Loewe
appliances and how to re-programme the remote
control keys.
Shadow effects of various materials, such as reinforced concrete,
metal surfaces, etc., attenuate the WIFI signal sometimes
significantly or completely.
TV set
WLAN router
PC
DSL
Help for configuration problems
Loewe cannot provide any support for PC hardware and software or
network components owing to the diverse configuration options with
home networks.
Please contact the administrator of your home network and/or specialist
dealer for support when setting up and for maintenance of network
connections, storage media, media server software and network devices
such as routers.
12
„ Connect 32
User manual
Switching the TV set ON/OFF
Switching the TV set ON/OFF
Switching the TV set on by means of the remote control
Press the on/off key.
Switching TV set to the standby mode
Switch the mains switch on the bottom side of the device to position I.
The indicator in the control panel on the front side lights up white. The
set is now in standby mode.
Or:
Press the TV key.
The previously watched station will be called.
Or:
Press numerical keys 1-9.
The corresponding station will be called.
After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further
operating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start
mode, see chapter System settings, section Control – Quick
start mode). Your TV set is ready to operate as soon as the status
indicator in the control panel lights up in green.
M
-
+
Switching the set off with the remote control (Standby)
Press the on/off key.
R
Mains switch
Control unit
Switching the TV on/off on the control unit
To switch the TV set into Operating mode or switch it off into Standby
mode, press the middle of the On/Off button.
By pressing one of the buttons on the control panel, the TV set can also
be turned on. Using the keys M/+/- you switch the TV set to TV mode
and to radio mode when using the R key.
Before switching off the set with the mains switch,
we recommend you to switch it to standby mode.
Switching off the TV set and connected additional devices
(System standby)
Press on/off key long:
Switch TV set and all CEC-capable devices connected
to the HDMI interfaces OFF to Standby mode (System
Standby).
Display
Quick start mode
Meaning of the colour of the LEDs in the On/Off button:
white:
TV set in standby.
Depending on the ambient brightness, the
white LED display is dimmed (1 and lights
up with a different degree of brightness.
If you enable the Quick Start Mode and you switch on the TV set from
standby, the TV picture can be immediately seen without delay. You
can specify the times at which your device will be in the Quick Start
Mode. Please note that in this case you will have a higher energy
consumption.
You can find the Quick Start Mode under System settings ‫ ט‬Control
‫ ט‬Quick start mode.
Default setting for the Quick Start Mode: off.
If the TV set is in quick start mode, the
white LED display is not dimmable and
starts with full brightness.
white, intermittent: TV set starts.
green:
TV set switched on.
red:
timer recording active.
blue:
TV set in standby and background operation
active (EPG data updating, software
update).
After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further
operating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start
mode, see chapter System settings, section Control – Quick
start mode). Your TV set is ready to operate as soon as the status
indicator in the control panel lights up in green.
(1
Technical information
Switching off the TV set with the mains switch during operation or an
inadvertent disruption to the power supply (e.g. power failure) can
cause damage to the hard disk file system of an externally connected
hard disk and hence loss of the recorded broadcasts.
Before switching off the set with the mains switch, we recommend
you to switch it to standby mode.
However, if unexpected problems occur when operating the hard
disk, formatting the external hard disk may rectify this. Refer to the
instructions in chapter System settings, section Control – Hard
disks.
Loewe are not liable for the loss of data on the hard disk externally
connected to your TV set. To avoid data loss, we recommend copying
important recordings to an additional external storage medium.
Automatic dimming depending on the room brightness (OPC) must be activated (see chapter System settings, section Picture).
13
„ Connect 32
User manual
General information on menu operation
General information on menu operation
Structure of the Menu screen
The most important keys for navigation will be explained in general.
The numbers in the text refer to the figure showing the remote control
in chapter Remote control.
Basically, the structure of the different menu screens is similar,
depending on the fact if a wizard, rendering media content or a setup
menu are concerned. The structure is explained by means of three
different illustrations.
The arrow keys 22 help you to navigate in the menus and lists of the
TV set and for selecting menu items. They are arranged in the middle
of the remote control in a circle around the OK key 11 . Later in this
user manual they will be represented as follows:
Screen structure: Wizard
A
INITIAL INSTALLATION - Menu language
Select the desired item.
Which menu language do you want to use for operation?
The OK key 11 is used to confirm a selection, for calling the highlighted
menu item and for opening the station list. In this user manual, an
instruction for this key looks like the following:
OKconfirm.
Deutsch
(de)
Ελληνικά
(el)
Svenska
(sv)
English
(en)
Polski
(pl)
Dansk
(da)
Français
(fr)
Magyar
(hu)
Português
(pt)
Italiano
(it)
Suomi
(fi)
Русский
(ru)
Español
(es)
Slovenščina (sl)
Norsk
(no)
Nederlands (nl)
Slovenčina
(sk)
₼㠖
(zh)
Čeština
Türkçe
(tr)
(cs)
Back with
Using the numerical keys of your remote control 29 you enter
programme channels and teletext pages directly. With key 0 you open
the AV list. In this user guide, entering numbers with numerical keys
is shown as follows:
Entering programme channel directly.
The numerical keys are also used to enter text (see chapter General
information on menu operation,section Entry of characters by
remote control).
The Home view is the central overview page for all of your TV set‘s
operating modes. You reach Home view with the HOME key 27 .
B
C
Proceed with
(A) Title bar with name of the wizard and the current operating step.
(B) Selected items, whose number can be different according to the
operating step.
(C) Bottom line showing the available operating controls. If required,
instructions and information are inserted.
Screen structure: Rendering of media content (example:
Audio player)
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
A
B
HOME: Call Home view.
Back
C
Pressing the BACK key 24 briefly brings you one level up in the wizard.
Pressing the BACK key longer closes all opened fade-ins. An example
for the BACK key in this user manual:
Hands Open
BACK: Stop text entry and exit entry box.
Shut Your Eyes
Chasing Cars
00:00
D
02:56
Pressing longer on the INFO key 25 displays an explanation of the
most important key functions of the current operating mode (e.g. TV
mode, teletext, PIP, etc.).
If the function for a key is not available, this will be indicated by an
on the right above.
inserted symbol
04:27
E
(A) Title bar with selected album / subdirectory.
(B) Menu item Back to exit the menu or to go back to the previous
menu item.
(C) Selection of album or title
(D) Time bar
(E) Bottom line with the different symbols for controlling the playback
function.
14
„ Connect 32
User manual
General information on menu operation
Screen structure: Setup (example: picture)
A
B
Picture
Picture adjustment
C
Contrast
Navigation: Wizards
D
If your desired display format has not been automatically
selected then you can choose it in the 3D settings menu.
You may display the 3D image in 2D or vice versa.
Brightness
DVB-S settings (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and
additional card.
Colour intensity
Scrambled stations
no
Search method
Network search Frequency search
Picture format
Symbol rate
22000
more ...
Accept Logical Channel Number
no
Image+
Active
Back with
(A) Selected function in the Home overview (here: system settings)
(B) Home Menu System settings, with selected menu item Picture.
(D) Help text for the selected menu item Picture > Contrast.
Navigation: Selection of elements (example: On-screen displays)
Highlighting and thus selecting the symbols/elements or menu items
on the screen can be effected by the arrow keys on the remote control.
So you can see all the time where you are. As soon as there is a bar
above a symbol or text, this is a selected element.
On-screen displays
On-screen
displays
B
yes
Proceed with
If the menu item(s) (marked white) is/are already
correctly preset:
Go to next step.
(C) Menu items Picture focusing on Contrast.
...
yes
Otherwise:
Mark the menu item that you want to change.
The update will be adopted automatically.
The fount colour of the previously active
item will change to grey. If not,
OK confirm the selection.
Go to next step.
Back
Display time
<
7sec
Volume display
off
on
Automatic menu info
off
on
Key explanation
off
on
Permanent clock display
off
on
Automatic HDMI hint
off
on
Right info display
off
on
Switch off curtain
<
Navigation: Element selection in lists using initials
>
A
C
Using the numerical keys of the remote control you can jump into list,
e.g., Internet radio station lists.
If the list is sorted in alphabetical order, you jump to the entered letter.
For example, when pressing the key 7 three times you jump to the first
list element starting with letter R.
7sec
>
In case of numerical sorting, you can directly select the stations with
the numerical keys.
If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear
simultaneously.
(A) Selectable elements / menu items.
(B) The text in the line where the marker is currently located is white.
(C) Move the selection marking by means of the arrow keys to the menu item to be set.
The position of the marking is to see by a grey rectangle.
In most cases, the marked menu item will be automatically
adopted. The font colour of the previously active item will change
to grey, that of the newly selected item to white.
In a few menus, to confirm a selected menu item is required by
pressing OK.
15
„ Connect 32
User manual
General information on menu operation
Entering characters with on-screen keyboard
For certain functions, entering letters or characters is required, e.g., for
Web addresses (URLs) in the browser or for renaming archive entries.
An on-screen keyboard appears for entering text.
Enter/change internet address
Back
http://www.loewe.tv
q
a
Adopt
(2 sec)
OK
w
s
e
r
d
t
z
f
g
u
i
h
j
k
y
x
c
v
b
n
m
.-/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
www.
.de
Space
Delete
.com
Cancel
o
I
ABC2ÄÆÃÅĀÀÁĆÇČ - abc2äæãåāâàáćçč
3
DEF3ĖËĒĘÊÈÉ - def3ėëēęêèé
4
GHI4ÏĪĮÎÌÍ - ghi4ïīįîîìí
5
JKL5 - jkl5
6
MNO6ÖOEÕŌÔÒÓØ - mno6ńñöoeõōôòóø
.
/
7
PQRS7ß - pqrs7ß
8
TUV8ÜŪÛÙÚ - tuv8üūûùú
9
WXYZ9 - wxyz9
0
.0-/_:+,;?!=&#%~@$*’()”§\{}[]<>´`^|
Cancel
on a letter with a triangle shows more letters
Select character / on-screen button,
OK Adopt character.
In the event of letters with a triangular, additional
letters are displayed when pressing the OK button
longer (2 sec).
For the selection of special characters use the .-/
field.
To conclude the entry:
Select Adopt,
OK confirm the selection.
Entry of characters by remote control
Alternatively to the on-screen keyboard you can also enter the desired
characters by means of the remote control (as with the keypad of a
mobile phone).
Select text entry field.
Under the 1st letter of the name you will see a line
indicating the current input position.
Input position one character to the right (also for
blanks).
Input position one character to the left.
Input the letters one after another. When using the
remote control, press the numerical keys just as on
a mobile phone keypad (0-9) until the desired symbol
is displayed. The available letters are printed on the
individual numeric buttons.
You find the exact key assignment in the character
table in the right column.
16
[space] 1
2
0
Adopt
Select Adopt,
OK confirm the selection.
Characters (uppercase - lowercase)
1
9
ABC
To conclude the entry:
Key
P
l
.net
Table of characters for entering text by means of the remote
control
„ Connect 32
User manual
On-screen displays
Operation without remote control
Explanation of keys
Operation without remote control
An explanation of the main operating keys that can be used at the
moment, can be displayed.
The availability of the key explanation is dependent on the currently
active operating situation.
Changing Volume
+ / – Increase/reduce volume.
INFO press longer: show Explanation of keys.
Switching radio on or off or switching to radio
R Radio on or switch between TV and Radio.
(2sec)
(2sec)
(2sec)
Timer list
Menu options
Station list
Expanded station list
Value-added service
Last station
Language / sound
Timeshift
Recording
Key explanation
Calling direct control on TV set
M Call direct control on TV set.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.
Operating
mode
Station selection
Explanation of symbols
AV selection
3D
On screen pages with operating symbols in the bottom line, an explanation
of the function appears as soon as the symbol is selected.
USB1 -> CRW_7266b
Contrast
Picture format
Back
Service
R Scroll down.
M Scroll up.
– Scroll left.
+ Scroll right, adopt settings, confirm.
Close all displays
Automatic menu info
Press M longer.
The automatic menu info provides an info text for the selected menu
item appropriate to the on-screen display that can assist you further
with the operation of your TV set.
An on-screen display is displayed.
...
Energy efficiency
Home Mode
Premium
Mode
The priority here is low energy consumption in home use. In this
case, the TV switches off automatically for the sake of saving
energy, after it has been out of operation for four hours.
Explanations of the settings:
Operating Switch between TV and radio operation.
mode
Stations Call Station selection.
selection
Shop Mode
AV selection Select AV interface.
Contrast Set contrast.
The power consumption of the TV set depends
directly on the value set here.
The factory setting is that the info display is shown
automatically for each menu item. In this case you can
temporarily hide the info texts with the INFO key.
Picture Selecting the picture format.
format
Service
Permanent clock display
The Service menu item is provided for service
purposes by dealers only.
The clock display can be permanently shown. It is always visible as
long as no other display is made.
You can switch the permanent clock display on or off in Home view
under System Settings‫ט‬Control‫ט‬more ...‫ ט‬On-screen displays.
17
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
Initial installation wizard
Initial installation after switching on for the first time
The Initial installation wizard starts automatically with an initial
installation. It may be called repeatedly again (see chapter System
settings,section Extras – Repeat initial installation).
Energy Home mode:
efficiency The emphasis for home use is on low energy
(continued) consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.
Premium mode:
This mode optimises the settings to a brighter
environment at a higher energy consumption. The
automatic dimmer is activated.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
If a parental lock is activated, the access code must be entered
before repeating initial installation (see chapter System settings,
section Control – Parental lock).
For information on navigation within the wizard refer to chapter
General information on menu operation.
Shop mode:
The picture settings are aligned to operation in
the presentation room. The automatic dimmer is
deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes, the
energy consumption is not reduced.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
First installation wizard routine
The selected settings affect the routine of the Initial installation wizard.
Menu
language
The presetting can be changed later in the System
settings under Control ‫ ט‬Energy efficiency.
INITIAL INSTALLATION - Menu language
Which menu language do you want to use for operation?
Deutsch
(de)
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
(el)
Svenska
(sv)
English
(en)
Polski
(pl)
Dansk
(da)
Français
(fr)
Magyar
(hu)
Português
(pt)
Italiano
(it)
Suomi
(fi)
ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ
(ru)
Español
(es)
Slovenščina (sl)
Norsk
(no)
Nederlands (nl)
Slovenčina (sk)
中文
(zh)
Čeština
(cs)
Türkçe
(tr)
Proceed to next step.
Location of
TV set
Proceed with
Location of TV set
Please specify the location of your TV set so that the available stations can be sorted
according to the specify country.
Select desired Menu language.
Selecting the language of the user guidance is the
wizard’s first step. Then you simply follow the
instructions on your TV screen.
(DK)
Denmark
(L)
Luxembourg
(S)
Sweden
(E)
Spain
(N)
Norway
(SK)
Slovakia
(F)
France
(NL)
Netherlands
(SLO) Slovenia
(FIN)
Finland
(NZ)
New Zealand
(TR)
(H)
Hungary
(P)
Portugal
(UK)
(I)
Italy
(PL)
Poland
(IRL)
Ireland
Back with
Turkey
United Kingdom
Other country
(RUS) Russia
Proceed with
Proceed to next step.
Select Location of TV set (national defaults
are adopted).
A licence agreement will be displayed.
Scroll through the licence agreement.
OK Confirm the licence agreement and proceed to
the next step.
For certain locations (e.g., Australia), there is finally
a selection screen where you can indicate in which
state/territory the device is being operated.
Energy
efficiency
Proceed to next step.
Energy efficiency
Here you define how energy efficiently you operate your TV. With the "Home Mode"
setting you put the focus on low energy consumption for home use. The "Premium Mode"
is optimised to a brighter environment with a higher energy consumption. The "Shop
Mode" is designed for operation in a showroom.
Operating
mode
Note: If you select "Home Mode" here, the TV set will automatically switch off to save
energy after no longer being operated for 4 hours.
Home mode
Back with
Premium mode
Shop mode
Proceed with
Operating mode
Please specify if you wish to use the full TV function of your set, or if you wish to use it
purely as a monitor.
As TV set
Back with
As monitor only
Proceed with
Select Energy efficiency.
Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall
be. The value for the contrast (and thus the
brightness of the background lighting) is adapted
and the automatic dimmer activated or
deactivated depending on the presetting.
The automatic shutdown is active in the mode
Home Mode.
Select the Operating mode.
Use the TV set as a TV set:
Continued with Connect antennas cable(s) (see
next page).
Use the TV set just as a monitor:
see chapter Initial installation, section TV set as a
monitor
18
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
Connect
antennas
cable(s)
Setting options for reception via Cable analog:
Connect antenna cable(s)
Your television will automatically search for stations. With OK , highlight which antenna
cables are available for your TV set and connect them to the correct antenna sockets,
which are specified here in the right-hand column.
Antenna cable(s) for:
to antenna socket(s):
Cable analog
ANT TV
Terrestrial (DVB-T)
ANT TV
Cable (DVB-C)
ANT TV
Satellite (DVB-S / cable 1)
ANT SAT
Satellite (DVB-S / cable 2)
ANT SAT2
Back with
If you have not selected Cable analog in step Connect antenna
cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section Setting
options for DVB-T reception.
TV/col.
standard
TV/col. standard
Please select the TV/colour standard.
Proceed with
Select antenna cable.
OK Connect/disconnect antenna cable.
Select the antenna cables that are connected to
your TV.
Ahead of each selected antenna, the symbol
appears.
Cable analog:
analogue stations via
cable
Terrestrial (DVB-T):
digital stations via
antenna
Cable (DVB-C):
digital stations via
cable
Satellite (DVB-S/cable 1):
digital stations via
satellite
Automatic BG+L
SECAM-BG
PAL-BG
SECAM-DK
PAL-DK
SECAM-L
PAL-I
Back with
NTSC
Proceed with
The selection of a Colour standard is only required
when the Location of TV set Other country was
selected. Otherwise, the country-specific default
settings will be preset when selecting the Location
of TV set. This step will be skipped then
Select appropriate colour standard.
Proceed to next step.
Satellite (DVB-S/cable 2): digital stations via
satellite
Proceed to next step.
The rest of the initial installation wizard routine
depends on the selected antennas (Cable analogue,
DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S) in step Connect antennas
cable(s).
The different antennas/types of reception are
described in the following sections of initial installation.
19
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-T reception:
If you have not selected Terrestrial (DVB-T) in step Connect
antenna cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section
Setting options for DVB-C reception.
Supply
voltage
Supply voltage DVB-T antenna
Please state here whether your DVB-T antenna needs a supply voltage. Antennas with an
integrated amplifier need a supply voltage on the antenna line.
Network
selection
no (0V)
Back with
yes (5V)
Proceed with
Network selection (DVB-T)
Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
Freeview
other network
Back with
Select supply voltage no / yes.
Proceed with
If several networks are available via DVB-T, you can
decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
Select network,
OK Confirm selection.
Settings
DVB-T settings
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and
additional card.
Scrambled stations
no
Search method
Channel search
yes
Accept Logical Channel Number
no
Frequency search
yes
Proceed with
Select and adapt settings for DVB-T reception.
Scrambled You can state whether coded stations are to be
stations searched for in the search/update.
Select yes to save all found scrambled stations.
However, these stations can only be received in
connection with a CA module and the appropriate
Smart Card.
The handling of the CA module is described in the
chapter System settings, section Extras – CA
module.
Search If you want to run the station search independently
method of the channel grid, select Frequency search for
the search method.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Proceed to next step.
20
How to align your DVB-T antenna is described in
chapter System settings, section Connections
– Antenna DVB.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to next step.
Back with
If you use a DVB-T antenna that requires a supply
voltage (active antenna) and which is not already
supplied via a power adaptor, then select yes (5V)
for the antenna’s power supply.
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-C reception:
If you have not selected Cable (DVB-C) in step Connect antenna
cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section Setting
options for DVB-S reception.
Network
selection
Network selection (DVB-C)
Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
Unitymedia
Standard
Back with
Proceed with
If several networks are available via DVB-C, you can
decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
The normal DVB-C settings are derived from the
selection of the location or network and do not need
to be changed.
Exactly which of the following settings are present is
dependent on which network is selected.
Network ID If you select none here, DVB signals of all current
transmitter networks are searched automatically
(recommended for most cable networks).
If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID
(necessary in the cable networks of some countries),
only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are
searched for automatically.
Your cable provider has the information you need.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-C) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Proceed to next step.
Select network.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
Settings
DVB-C settings
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and additional
card.
Scrambled stations
no
Search method
Network search Frequency search
Start frequency
044.00 MHz
Network ID
none
Accept Logical Channel Number
no
Back with
yes
00000
yes
Proceed with
Select and adapt settings for DVB-C
reception.
Scrambled You can state whether coded stations are to be
stations searched for in the search/update.
Select yes to save all found scrambled stations.
However, these stations can only be received in
connection with a CA module and the appropriate
Smart Card.
The handling of the CA module is described in the
chapter System settings, section Extras – CA
module.
Search If you select Frequency search here, a search is
method performed for all receivable stations.
With Network search, only the stations which
the networks supply are searched - either for
all receivable networks or only for the particular
network specified under Network ID.
Start The DVB stations are only searched for in the
frequency frequency range above the start frequency.
21
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-S reception:
If you have not selected Satellite (DVB-S/cable x) in step Connect
antenna cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section
Setting options for all types of reception.
Network
selection
other Select setting if the TV set is connected to a
communal single-cable system (without DiSEqC). Several
installation Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable.
Contrary to a DiSEqC one cable communal system
there are restrictions in the range of certain reception
frequencies in "common" single-cable community
systems.
Network selection (DVB-S)
Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
Proceed to next step.
ASTRA LCN
Standard
Back with
Proceed with
The rest of the initial installation wizard routine
depends on the selected satellite system in step Select
satellite installation.
The different satellite systems are described in the
following sections of initial installation.
Select network.
If several networks are available via DVB-S, you can
decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
Proceed to next step.
Select
satellite
installation
Select satellite installation
Please define which satellites you receive or which satellite equipment you use.
Single satellite
2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox
2 satellites on toneburst switch
Max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch
DiSEqC one cable communal system
Other communal installation
Indietro con
Avanti con
Selecting the satellite system.
Specify how you receive which satellite(s) (single
satellite or type of satellite system). Ask your
dealer in this regard.
The normal DVB-S settings are derived from the
selection of the location and do not need to be
changed in most cases.
Single Reception of a single satellite via a connected LNC
satellite (LNB).
2 satellites Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs
on 22 kHz (LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a 22
switchbox kHz switchbox.
2 satellites Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs
on toneburst (LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a
switch toneburst switch.
Max. 4 The TV set controls a DiSEqC multiswitch to which
satellites up to four LNCs (LNBs) for different satellites are
on DiSEqC connected.
multiswitch
DiSEqC Select setting if the TV set is connected to a DiSEqC
one cable single-cable system (according to EN 50494). Several
communal Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable.
system
22
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system (single satellite):
Select
single satellite
Satellite
selection
Select satellites
Please specify here which satellite you receive.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
Setting options for the satellite system (2 satellites on 22
kHz switchbox / 2 satellites on toneburst switch):
OK
button.
Select satellites
Please select satellite 1 and satellite 2.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
OK
button.
Optus D1160°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Türksat 42°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Nilesat 7°W
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
none
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Optus D1160°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
Türksat 42°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Nilesat 7°W
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Telestart12 12,5°W
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Intelsat901 18°W
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Telestart12 12,5°W
Back with
Satellit 1
Proceed with
Satellit 2
Back with
Select satellite,
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed with
Mark Satellite 1 / Satellite 2,
select satellite.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to next step.
Dual/single
band
Dual/single band (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
Here, please specify whether you are using a Dual Band (Universal) LNB or a Single Band
LNB.
Dual band (low/high)
Back with
LNC
frequency
(22 kHz
Switch box)
Single band
Proceed with
LNB frequencies
Please select the LNB frequency for the Low Band.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the
9750 MHz
10000 MHz
10200 MHz
10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E Low Band
9750 MHz
10000 MHz
10200 MHz
10600 MHz
Back with
Select Dual band (low/high) or Single band.
Here you specify if you use a Dual Band (Universal)
LNB or a Single LNB.
Proceed to next step.
LNC
frequencies
LNC
frequencies
(Toneburst
switch)
button.
OK
ASTRA1 19,2°E Low Band
Proceed with
LNB frequencies
Please specify the oscillator frequency/frequencies of your LNB.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the
ASTRA1 19,2°E low band
9750 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E high band
10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E low band
9750 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E high band
10600 MHz
Back with
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
OK
button.
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
Proceed with
LNB frequencies
Please specify the oscillator frequency for your LNB.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
ASTRA1 19,2°E low Band
Back with
9750 MHz
10000 MHz
OK
button.
10200 MHz
10600 MHz
Proceed with
Set LNB frequencies.
OK Adopt settings.
The setting of the LNB frequency is only called
when you have used the setting Single band
in step Dual / single band.
Set LNB frequencies.
OK Adopt settings.
Normally, you do not need to change the values
unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system
uses a different oscillator frequency (important
for the frequency display).
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S
reception (continued).
Normally, you do not need to change the values
for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of
your satellite system uses a different oscillator
frequency (important for the frequency display).
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S
reception (continued).
23
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
LNC .
frequencies
Setting options for the satellite system
(max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch):
DiSEqC
multiple
switch
Settings DiSEqC multiple switch
With the refresh rate you determine how often a DiSEqC command is output. This is only
necessary in a cascaded system. Your system provider will bei able to tell you more about
this.
Repeat rate
none
Control voltage 13 / 18V
off
22kHz signal
Band
Toneburst
2
on
off
Back with
1
Position
Position
Option
22kHz signal The 22 kHz signal controls the switching between
high and low band in the Band setting. The Position
setting controls the selection of the satellites in nonDiSEqC capable components.
Toneburst The Toneburst controls the selection of the satellites
in non-DiSEqC but Toneburst capable components
with the Position and Option settings.
Proceed to next step.
Select satellites
Please select satellite 1 to satellite 4.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
Satellit 2
Satellit 3
OK
button.
Satellit 4
none
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Optus D1160°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Türksat 42°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Nilesat 7°W
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Telestart12 12,5°W
Proceed with
Mark Satellite 1 ... Satellite 4,
Select satellite.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
24
9750 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E high band
10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E low band
9750 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E high band
10600 MHz
Eutelsat W2 16°E low band
9750 MHz
Eutelsat W2 16°E high band
10600 MHz
Türksat 42°E low band
9750 MHz
Türksat 42°E high band
10600 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
10200 MHz
11000 MHz
OK
button.
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
10600 MHz
11250 MHz
Proceed with
Proceed with
Control The control voltage controls the switching of the
voltage polarisation level (horizontal/vertical) in non-DiSEqC
capable components (e.g., control of single LNBs via
DiSEqC multiswitch).
Back with
ASTRA1 19,2°E low band
Back with
Repeat rate The refresh rate determines how often a DiSEqC
command is output. A refresh is only necessary with
cascaded systems.
Satellit 1
Please select the LNB frequencies for both High and Low Bands.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the
off
Select and adapt settings for the DiSEqC
multiswitch.
OK Adopt settings.
Satellite
selection
LNB frequencies
Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the values.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S
reception (continued).
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
LNB .
frequencies
Setting options for the satellite system
(DiSEqC one cable communal system):
Number of
system
channel used
LNB frequencies
Please specify the oscillator frequency for the Low Band. High band frequency is auotm. adjusted
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
ASTRA1 19,2°E low Band
9750 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E high Band
10600 MHz
10000 MHz
10750 MHz
10200 MHz
10600 MHz
11000 MHz
11250 MHz
Number of system channels used
Do you wish to use one or two transmission channels in your single cable communal
installation? With two channels - provided they are available to you from the installation - it
is possible to watch different stations at the same time in the main screen and in the PIP.
One channel
Back with
Two channels
Retour avec
Continuer avec
Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the
values unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite
system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
OK Adopt settings.
Select One channel or Two channels.
The number of system channels can be
selected only when just one DVB-S antenna
cable is used when selecting antennas.
Here you specify if you use one or two transmission
channels in your one cable communal system.
In case of two channels - as far as they are
available in your system - different stations can
be simultaneously viewed on the main picture and
on PIP.
You get more information on your system from
your dealer.
Proceed to next step.
Manual
registration
(for socket
ANT SAT)
Manual registration (for socket ANT SAT)
Please log on to your DiSEqC single-cable system that is connected to the antenna input
ANT SAT and specify the desired transmission channel and associated transmission
frequency. Please also indicate whether your single-cable system has a broad frequency
band instead of a division into high and low band. If your antenna system is designed for
this, it is possible to protect your used transmission data from being used by other
participants by having a PIN.
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the OK button.
Transmission channel
1
Transmission frequency
1284 MHz
PIN protection
Ja
Define/change PIN
Proceed to next step.
Back with
DiSEqC
one cable
communal
installation
Proceed with
Select DiSEqC single cable communal installation
Please enter here which DiSEqC single cable system you are using. The following setting
parameters of your system are then adapted accordingly.
User defined
DELTA SUM-918
DELTA SUM-514
DELTA SUM-928
KATHREIN EXR-551
DELTA SUM-516
DELTA MSU-50x
KATHREIN EXR-552
DELTA SUM-518
DELTA MSU-90x/170x
KATHREIN EXR-154
Back with
2
3
4
5
1400 MHz
6
7
8
1516 MHz
1632 MHz
1748 MHz
Nein
000
Proceed with
Select and adjust settings for the DiSEqC
single cable communal installation.
OK Adopt settings.
KATHREIN EXR-501
Proceed with
The manual registration must be made for both ANT
SAT jacks when either two DVB-S antenna cables or
two system channels are used.
Transmission Select the desired transmission channel.
channel
S elect DiSEqC single cable communal
installation.
Proceed to next step.
PIN protection If your system is designed for it, it is possible to
protect your used transmission data from use by
other subscribers with a PIN.
Satellite
selection
Select satellites
Please specify here which satellite you receive.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
OK
button.
none
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Optus D1160°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Türksat 42°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Nilesat 7°W
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Telestart12 12,5°W
Back with
Transmission Select the corresponding transmission frequency.
frequency
Proceed with
Define/ Here you can determine and change the PIN for
change PIN PIN protection. Only possible, when yes has been
selected for PIN protection.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S
reception (continued).
Select satellites from list,
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
25
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system (other communal
installation):
Select
single satellite
Select satellites
Please specify here which satellite you receive.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
OK
button.
Optus D1160°E
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Eutelsat 5 West A 5°W
Türksat 42°E
Eutelsat 16A 16°E
Nilesat 7°W
Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E
Eutelsat 7 West A 7,2°W
Eutelsat 36A 36°E
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Eutelsat 8 West A 8°W
Eutelsat 28A 28,5°E
Eurobird 7A 7°E
Eutelsat 12 West A 12,5°W
ASTRA2 28,2°E
ASTRA4A 4,8°E
Telestart12 12,5°W
ASTRA3 23,5°E
Thor/Intelsat10-02 0,8
Intelsat901 18°W
Back with
Proceed with
Select satellite.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
LNB
frequencies,
Supply
voltage
LNB frequency, supply voltage
Please specify the oscillator frequency for your LNB.
If your TV set is connected to a single cable system without an external power supply, you
can connect the antenna supply (13 or 18V/max. 350mA) with „13V“ or „18V“.
ASTRA1 19,2°E
9750 MHz
10000 MHz
Supply voltage
off
18V
Back with
13V
10200 MHz
10600 MHz
Proceed with
Select and adapt settings.
LNC Normally, you do not need to change the values for
frequency high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your
satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
Supply If your set is connected to a single-cable system
voltage without external voltage supply, you can connect
the antenna supply (13V or 18V / max. 500mA).
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for all types of
reception.
26
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued):
Test reception
You should now receive a picture and sound from the following satellite:
Astra1 19,2°E
C/N
Level
Otherwise, please adjust your antenna. If it is already correctly adjusted, please continue all
the same, without receiving picture or sound for the moment.
Back with
Proceed with
After you have made the previous settings, you should
receive picture and sound of the selected satellites
(only possible for Astra1 and HOTBIRD).
Proceed to next step.
Settings
DVB-S settings (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
Please specify whether you want to search for scrambled stations too.
Note: Scrambled stations can only be received with an integrated CA module and
additional card.
Scrambled stations
no
Search method
Network search Frequency search
Symbol rate
22000
Accept Logical Channel Number
Back with
no
yes
yes
Proceed with
Select and adapt settings.
If several satellites are received, the following settings
must be made for every satellite. The type of settings
available may differ depending on the selected satellite
or network.
Scrambled You can state whether coded stations are to be
stations searched for in the search/update.
Select yes to save all found scrambled stations.
However, these stations can only be received in
connection with a CA module and the appropriate
Smart Card.
Handling of the CA module is described in chapter
System settings, section Extras – CA module.
Search If you select Frequency search here, a search is
method performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, from all receivable networks all the stations
are searched which are supplied by these networks.
Depending on the selected network, this step
might possibly be skipped.
Symbol rate The symbol rate is specified by the satellite provider
and normally does not need to be changed.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-S) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for all types of
reception.
27
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
Age-related .
lock
Setting options for all types of reception:
Subtitle and
audio
languages
(DVB only)
Subtitle and audio languages (DVB)
You can preset the desired languages and reserve languages for subtitles and audio for
DVB programmes here.
Age-related lock
If you enter an age restriction here, all DVB programmers are locked which have an
appropriate age code and can only be watched by entering the access code.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
You may preset whether you would always like to hear a special tone for visually-impaired
persons (if provided by the station), which describes the operation in more detail, with the
aid of an audio commentary. In "System Settings -> Sound," you can set its volume in
relation to the "normal" volume by means of the "Audio commentary volume."
Note: The newly selected parameter in each case must be confirmed with the
Subtitle (DVB)
Audio (DVB)
Favoured language
OK
No age-related lock
Proceed with
Audio commentary
Alternative language
German
Italian
Czech
Hungarian
S
Englisch
Spanish
Greek
Finnish
T
French
Dutch
Polish
Slovenian
S
Back with
Proceed with
Select Age-related lock.
OK Confirm selection.
Select desired languages and alternative
languages for subtitles and audio for DVB
programmes.
Set up audio commentary for the visually
impaired.
OK Confirm selection.
You can specify an age limit for your TV set here.
DVB broadcasts which have an appropriate age
identification are locked and can only be watched
after entering the access code.
In some countries, the yes/no option does not
exist for some channels, and a compulsory age
check must be entered.
Proceed to next step.
Check
search
settings
Special security level
button.
Proceed to next step.
Check search settings
Your TV performs the following automatic search with the listed settings. If you wish to
correct them, please scroll back.
Location of TV set
Signal source(s)
Satellite system
Satellite(s)
Start automatic search
(UK) United Kingdom
Cable analogue, DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S
Single satellite
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Antenne Wizard
Time and
date
Time and date
Cancel
Please enter the date and time if none has been entered or if they are incorrect.
Back with
Adopt with
Date
OK
14.01.2015
Time
Back with
You will see a list of the selected settings. You can go
back step by step with the key to make any changes
to the settings.
OK Start automatic search.
Now, the TV set searches for TV and radio stations.
It searches successively for stations from the selected
signal sources. The progress of search is shown by a
progress bar.
In case of a repeated initial installation routine (via
Extras)
Home view under System settings
all stored stations will be first deleted here.
p
16:30:00
Proceed with
The data capture for time and date is set to automatic
ex factory.
If time and date are automatically obtained via the
receive path, no entry is necessary.
For more information, see the chapter System
settings, section Control – Time and Date.
Proceed to next step.
Info
station search
Result TV
The automatic station search and sort have been stopped.
1164 new TV station(s) has (have) been found.
Proceed with
The number of found TV stations is displayed.
Proceed to next step.
The number of found radio stations is displayed.
Proceed to next step.
continued on the next page
28
p
„ Connect 32
User manual
Initial installation
Sound
playback
via ...
Inform about
new software
Software-Update
Sound playback via ...
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your TV sound. If you
select a "Speaker system", this must be connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO LINK socket on the
back of the TV set (with an additional adapter if necessary).
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK button.
TV speakers
HiFi/AV amplifier
You have the option of performing a software update via the Internet. Please specify
whether the TV set is to automatically inform you about newly available software.
In accordance with the local laws and regulations, we would like to point out that set
numbers, the installation location of your TV set, previous updates and the current
software version will be processed and stored by an IT system, if you wish to perform
software updates via the Internet. This data ensures that we are always able to offer you an
optimum service. All data is treated as confidential.
Note: you can change this setting at any time by selecting the following options: "System
Settings -> Control->Software update -> via Internet"."
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Inform about new software
Back with
Proceed with
Select sound components.
OK Confirm selection.
This selection indicates which sound components
you want to use to hear your TV sound. Depending
on the selection, the sound component wizard
starts with which you can make further settings.
The sound component wizard is described in
chapter System settings, section Connections –
Sound components and can also be started at
any time beyond the initial installation.
Back with
Do not inform
Finish wizard with
Select option.
When selecting Information on new software
updates, your TV set checks at definite intervals
whether a newer software than the one installed in the
TV set is available in the Internet. A screen message
appears when a new software update is found.
Back: Exit wizard.
The initial installation wizard is complete.
Proceed to next step.
TV set as a monitor
Network
configuration
You can also use your TV set just as a monitor, i.e. if you only use it with
a PC. The tuner in the TV set cannot be used in this mode.
Network configuration
Please specify if you wish to configure a network at this time. You can also perform this at a
more convenient time later (via 'System settings->Multimedia->Netzworksettings>Networking').
Configure now
Selection of Switch-on channel
Do not configure or configure later
Please specify which AV channel your TV set should switch on to.
Back with
Proceed with
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
PC IN
AVS
AV
Select option.
VIDEO
Back with
Proceed with
With the selection, specify whether you want to
configure the available network adaptor now.
Configure now: Make settings for network
adaptor and proxy server (see chapter System
settings,section Multimedia / Network –
Network settings).
Do not configure or configure later: Skip
network adaptor configuration.
Proceed to next step.
Select AV connection.
The selected AV connection is shown when
switching the TV on.
Proceed to next step.
Initial setup continues with the Time and date setup.
29
„ Connect 32
User manual
Home view
Home view
Home view - Favourites
The Home view is the central overview page for all of your TV set‘s
operating modes.
You will find your favourites on the right of the individual operating
modes.
The list of options on the left gives you access to the operating modes
TV, Video, Audio/Radio, Photo and Web. By means of System
settings you have access to more functions and you can configure
your TV set.
By selecting the operating mode, the favourites are filtered accordingly.
When selecting Home, the favourites of all operating modes are
displayed together.
The right part of the screen displays the favourites depending on the
selected operating mode (see also right column) and the available
sources.
The number of selectable items varies depending on the TV
equipment, network connection, available media/media servers
and connected gadgets.
Call Home view
HOME: Calling the Home view.
TV
ZDF HD
RTL Television
Audio/Radio
ProSieben
VOX
In the operating modes of the TV set you can define the current object
(e.g. station, music title, teletext page, website, photo, etc.) as favourite.
In the selected operating mode, the active object will be added as
favourite and placed at the end.
SAT.1
Video
Photo
Creating favourites
Create favourite.
If there are more favourites than can be shown on one
page, this will be indicated by rectangular symbols in
the upper line of Home view. Example:
Home
Das Erste HD
After an initial installation, some favourites will already be
automatically created depending on the installation site of the TV
set and of existing Internet links (e.g. TV stations, online links).
kabel eins
arte HD
Three pages with favourites exist. The first page of
them is indicated. Equivalent is the display with the
symbols for the source selection.
Web
THE LIBERATION OF ART
Loewe channel
LUMAS
P+/P– Scrolling through the individual pages.
YouTube
System settings
Select menu item / Favourite / Source,
OK call.
Description of the individual sections/functions:
Editing favourites
You can edit the existing favourites in Home view. Change the
sequence of your favourites as you wish or delete favourites you do
not need any more.
HOME: Calling the Home view.
Home: Under the item Home all favourites of the different
sections are summarized.
TV: You can access the TV favourites and a variety of
sources such as Station lists, EPG, Timer) via the item TV.
See chapter TV for further information.
Video: The item Video gives you access to videos from
local (USB, home network) and online sources.
Select the favourite to be changed.
MENU: Change favourite.
Move favourite or delete it (see below).
Moving favourites
See chapter Video for further information.
Move favourite to new position.
Audio/Radio: With item Audio/Radio you find music files
from your local server(s) and USB storage media as well
as from DVB and Internet radio.
BACK: Finish procedure.
See chapter Audio/Radio for further information.
Photo: Via menu item Photo you can view photos from
your local media on your TV screen.
Deleting favourites
TEXT: Delete selected favourite.
BACK: Finish procedure.
See chapter Photo for further information.
Web: Here you have access to multimedia content in the
Internet (MediaNet) as well as a high-quality web browser.
Home view - Sources
See chapter Web for further information.
To the right of your favourites, if any, you will find the selection of
sources in the individual operating modes.
Depending on the operating mode, this can be, for example, different
station lists (analogue, DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S, AV-list, extended station
list), DVB radio, Internet radio, timer list, MediaNet, external USB
storage devices, media servers on the network or the DR+ archive of
the internal hard disk.
System settings: In menu item System settings you find
the configuration menu of the TV set e.g., with settings for
picture, sound, connections or sound components.
See chapter System settings for further information.
30
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Volume / Station
Selecting a station out of the station list
TV
In TV mode that can be selected via the Home overview, you can use the
basic TV functions of your TV set. In TV mode you will have numerous
functionalities at your disposal as, for instance, PIP, EPG and, if offered
by the station, HbbTV (hybrid broadcast broadband television).
By means of the function list you may call additional options and
settings all around TV operation.
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK Call station list.
ASTRA1
19,2°E
Setting the volume
Das Erste HD
20:15 - 21:45 Tatort
9
ZDF HD
20:15 - 22:45 Toskana
22:45 - 23:20 Bilder der Wissenschaft
10
BR Nord HD
21:15 - 21:45 Vor Ort - Die Reportage
11
SAT.1
12
RTL Television
21:15 - 22:15 Dr. House
13
n-tv
14
ProSieben
21:15 - 22:15 The Big Bang Theory
15
3satHD
20:45 - 21:45 Erlebnis Natur
16
ARTE HD
21:30
17.07.2014
Digital
2
20:14 - 22:19 Lizzy und die Kommisare
Switching sound off/on
Sound off.
Sound on:
8
Press key again or increase the volume
using V+.
Setting the volume
V+/V– Volume up/down.
Mark stations,
OK the marked station will be called.
The volume control bar will be displayed in the upper
right corner.
The volume control bar can be deactivated in the
menu System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬more ... ‫ט‬
On-screen displays.
Select station
Select station with P+ / P–
When using Instant Channel Zapping, you can very quickly switch to other
stations. The instant channel zapping technology uses the second tuner
in the background in order to pre-select the next stations. Due to this
pre-selection, you can now switch to this channel within a very short time.
While using the digital recorder DR+ with externally attached USB
hard drives (time-shift operation, archive recording) or in the PIP
mode, Instant Channel Zapping is not available. Switching takes
place at „normal“ speed.
For encrypted stations Instant Channel Zapping is only possible to
a limited extent.
P+/P– Station up/down.
The number and the name of the station along with the
title of the programme and that of the next programme
will be briefly shown. Also, the status display with time/
date and programme-dependent symbols appears.
The symbols of the status display are described in
chapter TV, section Status display.
Select station using the numerical keys
If you select an unoccupied station position, the next available
station is selected.
long
short short long
all short
1-digit stations
Press the numerical key a little bit longer: The channel
will change immediately or press the numerical key
briefly, the station changes after 2 seconds (changes
immediately if up to 9 stations are stored).
2-digit and 3-digit stations
Press first (and second) numerical key briefly. Keep the
last numerical key depressed a little bit longer: The
channel will change immediately or: press all the
numerical keys briefly, the channel changes two
seconds after the last number has been entered (with up
to 99 or 999 saved channels it will change immediately).
Changing the station list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK Call station list,
call overview of station lists.
DVB-C
8
Das Erste HD
20:15 - 21:45 Tatort
ASTRA1
19,2°E
9
ZDF HD
21:30
20:15 - 22:45 Toskana
22:45 - 23:20 Bilder der Wissenschaft
Personal list 1
10
BR Nord HD
21:15 - 21:45 Vor Ort - Die Reportage
11
SAT.1
12
RTL Television
21:15 - 22:15 Dr. House
13
n-tv
14
ProSieben
21:15 - 22:15 The Big Bang Theory
15
3satHD
20:45 - 21:45 Erlebnis Natur
16
ARTE HD
AV list
20.12.2014
Digital
2
20:14 - 22:19 Lizzy und die Kommisare
Manage list
Mark the desired list.
The station list will be changed according to the
selection. The list will be adopted automatically.
Move to the newly selected list.
Explanations of the station lists:
The number and the names of the possible station lists depend on
the available signal sources (antennas, TV reception networks, etc.).
ASTRA LCN Only stations from the selected source / reception
Analogue network are indicated in the station list.
DVB-C
DVB-T
Personal list Only stations of the selected personal list are indicated
in the station list. The name of the list may be changed.
AV list Exclusively AV inputs are shown in the station list.
Manage list Call up the station list editing menu (System settings ‫ ט‬Stations ‫ ט‬Station lists TV).
4-digit stations
Press all four numerical keys briefly, the station
changes immediately.
continued on the next page ‫ט‬
31
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Station
Selecting stations by means of the expanded station list
Selecting stations by personal lists
You can save your preferred stations in personal lists (e.g., for several
users). Each personal list can contain up to 99 stations.
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK Call station list,
call function list.
Personal list available (creating a new personal list
via Manage list ‫ ט‬New personal list).
Mark expanded station list,
call expanded station list.
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
1 Das Erste HD
13 ZDF.kultur HD
2 ZDF HD
14 ZDFinfokanal HD
15 SAT.1 HD
ASTRA1
19,2°E
10
3 BR Nord HD
Das Erste HD
20:15 - 21:45 Tatort
4 SAT.1
16 RTL HD
Personal list 1
11
ZDF HD
20:15 - 22:45 Unterwegs
22:45 - 23:20 Bilder der Wissenschaft
5 RTL
17 ProSieben HD
2 ZDF HD
6 n-tv
18 VOX HD
21:00-21:45
Toskana
7 ProSieben
19 kabel eins HD
8 3sat HD
20 SUPER RTL HD
9 ARTE HD
21 N24 HD
A..Z
Search
<
OK Call station list.
Open overview of station lists.
Back
Expanded station list
ASTRA LCN
>
<
10 EinsPlus
22 TELE5 HD
11 Eurosport
23 SPORT1 HD
12 ZDF Neo HD
24 NICK/CC HD
All stations
AV list
12
RTL Television
21:15 - 22:15 Dr. House
13
SAT.1
14
3satHD
20:45 - 21:45 Erlebnis Natur
15
BR Nord HD
21:15 - 21:45 Vor Ort - Die Reportage
16
ProSieben
21:15 - 22:15 The Big Bang Theory
Manage list
21:30
20.12.2014
Digital
2
20:14 - 22:19 Lizzy und die Kommisare
>
P+/P– Scrolling in the station list page by page.
Or:
Mark the desired personal list.
The station list will be changed according to the
selection. The list will be adopted automatically.
Move to the newly selected list.
For numerical sorting: Enter the channel number. The
marker will jump to the selected station.
Mark the station.
OK The marked station will be called. Or:
Mark stations.
OK The marked station will be called.
Select station directly with numerical keys.
OK The marked station will be called.
For alphabetical sorting: Enter the first letter. The first
station for the specified letters is marked.
Explanation of the icons following the station names:
Locked station.
Mark the station.
OK The marked station will be called.
HDTV station.
DVB-T station (digital terrestrial via antenna).
Filter and sort options of the expanded station list
DVB-C station (digital via cable).
Using the on-screen buttons on the bottom line of the expanded station
list you can filter and sort the station list by various options.
DVB-S station (digital via satellite).
Scrambled station.
MENU: Switching between list and bottom line.
0..9 Numerical sorting of the station list.
History
A..Z Alphabetical sorting of the station list.
Recently selected stations are saved in History.
Searching This allows you to do targeted searches for stations.
The station name is to be entered via the on-screen
keyboard. The entry is described in chapter General
information on the operation.
Signal Select the signal source, the stations of which are
source to be displayed in the extended station list (e.g.,
Analogue, DVB-C, DVB-T, ASTRA LCN, Personal
station list, AV list).
All stations Here you can filter the content of the station list
according to various criteria. Shall All Stations,
only HD stations, stations that are Locked or
Scrambled or Unscrambled, CI+ Protected
stations be indicated.
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
Yellow button: call History.
Das Erste HD
ZDF HD
VOX
Select entry,
OK call.
The last station can also be selected directly:
Yellow button pressing longer: last station (1.
(1
Software version 2.1.x and higher.
32
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Status display
Explanations of the symbols in the status display:
Status display
General symbols:
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
INFO: Show status display.
Language/sound selection available.
Subtitles available.
9
ZDF HD
21:30
20:15 - 21:45 Toskana
21:45 - 22:00 heute -journal
20.12.2014
Digital
Channel selection for multi-channel providers.
2
HDTV programme.
(2sec)
(2sec)
(2sec)
Timer list
Menu options
Station list
Expanded station list
Value-added service
Last station
Language / sound
Timeshift
Recording
Key explanation
In the left upper corner you will see in the marked field
the number and name of the station, the transmission
time and (if available) the title of the current programme.
The bar (if available) indicates the progress of the
current programme. If information about the current
programme is available, this can be called by pressing
the INFO key again.
In another adjacent field to the right, the programme
info of the following programme is displayed additionally for DVB stations.
The field in the upper right corner contains the time,
the date and, depending on the DVB station and
according to availability, various additional information,
which is represented by symbols (see column on the
right).
A window with button descriptions is displayed in the
bottom right corner. The automatic display of the
Explanation of keys with status display can be switched
off via System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬more ... ‫ט‬
On-screen displays ‫ט‬Key explanation.
By pressing the INFO key longer the Explanation of
keys can be displayed regardless of the status display
(see also chapter On-screen displays, section
Explanation of keys).
HbbTV mode available from this station.
Transmitted audio signal:
Mono
Mono audio transmission analogue.
Dual
channel
Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2)
analogue.
1+1
Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2)
digital.
Stereo
Stereo sound transmission analogue.
Stereo (AAC+) Stereo sound transmission (HEAAC).
‫ܐ‬
۲ Digital
۲ Digital+
Stereo sound transmission digital (PCM).
Dolby digital sound transmission (DD).
Dolby digital sound transmission (DD+).
۲ Digital (AAC+) Dolby digital AAC+ sound transmission (HEAAC).
MPEG
MPEG sound transmission.
Transmitted audio channels:
‫܂‬
DD 1.0 / Mono
‫܆‬
DD 2.0 / MPEG 2.0
‫܉‬
DD 3.0
‫܈‬
DD 4.0
The status display is shown automatically every time
you change channels.
‫܋‬
DD 5.0
The status display is hidden automatically at the end
of the display time.
‫܍‬
DD 2.1
If you want to hide the status display manually before
the display time ends, you can do this with the BACK
key.
‫܅‬
DD 3.1
܏
DD 4.1
‫ۿ‬
DD 5.1
33
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Function list / AV list
Explanations of the symbols in the function list (continued):
Function list (TV mode)
The function list contains settings and additional options. Die individual
List items will be briefly explained as follows:
The function list can be opened for the current station or the selected
station list. Depending on this, some list items may possibly not
be available.
Function list for the current station:
MENU: Call function list.
Function list for the selected station list:
OK Call station list,
call function list.
9
Call Edit station list.
Delete stations, shift stations, restore deleted stations.
Menu item is displayed only when the function list for the
station list is opened (see left column).
Call Rename.
The name of analogue stations and the designations of the
connections in the AV list can be changed.
Call Store stations.
Add current station to a favourites list.
The menu item is only shown, when at least one favourites
list is available.
You can open the entire station list
in full screen mode here. It can be
filtered in accordance with specific
criteria.
ZDF HD
20:15 - 21:45 Toskana
21:45 - 22:00 heute -journal
Subtitles
Recording
Sound mode
AV list (AV Source)
Selecting the AV source via the AV list
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
Open station list AV list.
AV list
Select function,
OK call.
1
HDMI 1
2
HDMI 2
3
HDMI 3
4
HDMI 4
5
PC IN
6
AVS
Explanations of the symbols in the function list:
Open Expanded station list.
Call up Language / sound. The available sound formats and
their designations depend on the programme being broadcast.
Menu item will only be indicated when several languages/
sound tracks are available.
Call up Subtitles selection.
Menu item will only be indicated when subtitles are available.
Open recording dialogue to programme a Recording.
Select desired connection,
OK switch over.
If the selected AV source provides a signal (picture), it
should be visible now.
When selecting VIDEO, you switch to the signal source
Cable analogue, channel E36. The TV set can display
the signal from an external source via the antenna input
TV ANT.
Set Sound mode (number of speakers).
Only playback of the audio signal from the AV source (screen is off)
Call up Sound settings.
Call up and adjust Headphone volume.
Call up Picture settings.
Activate PIP.
Move picture vertically up/down.
Switch screen off.
Switching the screen ON again: OK, BACK or green
coloured key.
The menu item is only shown when DVB radio, Internetradio or an AV source is active.
Add current station as Favourite to Home view.
Changes the Sorting between numerically and alphabetically.
Menu item is displayed only when the function list for the
station list is opened (see above).
34
To play only the sound of a connected media player (e.g. MP3 player),
the AV sources can be selected so that the screen goes blank.
Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
Open station list AV list.
Select desired connection,
OK press at least for two seconds.
Selecting the AV source via the station list
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
OK Call station list.
Call overview of station lists.
Select AV list.
The AV list will be displayed.
Move to the AV list.
Select desired AV source,
OK switch to AV source.
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Meaning of the colours in the EPG
Electronic Programme Guide – EPG
EPG stands for Electronic Programme Guide and provides you with
on-screen programme details. With the system, as with a printed
programme guide, you can learn about the current programme. In
addition programmes can be sorted according to certain topics,
memorised, and also recordings can be programmed.
The coloured labels indicate the genre of the respective programme.
When filtering with genre selection in the header, the programmes of
the selected genre will be highlighted.
Movies
News
Starting and ending EPG
Show
EPG: Switch EPG on / off.
Sports
Today
17:46
10
News
DVB-C
18:00
19:00
20:00
18:00 - 18:50
SOKO Wismar
11
17:30 - 18:00
Unter uns
12
17:15 - 18:00
Brisant
18:00 - 18:30
Child
19:25 - 20:15
Küstenwache
18:30
18:00 - 18:50
Verbotene Liebe
18:45
19:05 - 19:40
Alles was zählt
Music
19:40 - 20:15
18:50 - 19:45
13
17:29 - 17:59
17:59 - 18:31
18:31 - 19:15
14
16:55 - 17:55
taff
17:58 - 18:29
Die Simpsons
18:29 - 18:58
Die Simpsons
15
17:00 - 18:00
18:00 - 19:00
Arts
19:15 - 19:59
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
Social
18:58 - 20:14
Galileo
Education
19:00 - 20:00
EPG is only available for DVB stations.
Hobby
The first time you start EPG, a wizard will start that
guides you through the necessary presettings.
Series
Depending on the number of stations selected for EPG,
it may take some time until the programme information
is displayed.
EPG wizard
In this dialogue you decide, for which station EPG data should be
collected and displayed. With the number of stations the time for
nocturnal data acquisition will increase. We recommend, also for
reasons of distinctness to select only those stations, which you receive
regularly.
When the EPG is started for the first time:
Continue in the wizard and call up the EPG Station
selection.
MENU: Switch between the station list and the
on-screen buttons in the bottom line.
Changing the station list:
Mark station list in the bottom line,
OK select desired station list.
Select station for EPG:
Mark the the single station,
OK Select / deselect station for EPG.
For display in the EPG, the selected stations are marked
with a check mark .
Or:
EPG Operation
In the left column there is a list of stations of the selected source/station list (e.g. DVB-C, personal list). With the on-screen buttons in the
header of the EPG you can select the day of the programme preview,
change the source and filter the programmes as to their genre.
P+/P– Scrolling in the station list page by page.
Scrolling in the station list.
Scrolling through the programmes.
OK short: (highlighted TV programme is running):
EPG will be closed and the programme is
selected.
short: (highlighted programme not yet started):
Detailed information on the selected
programme will be called.
long: Change preview image to the station of the
highlighted programme.
INFO: short: Call detailed information on the selected
programme (see next page).
long: show Explanation of keys.
REC: Schedule the recording of the highlighted
programme.
Control in header:
MENU: Go to header.
Select Mark all.
OK All stations of the station list will be activated for EPG.
Mark selection of date, source, genre.
OK Accept changes.
Or:
MENU: Move from date to genre or from genre to
station list.
Select Unmark all.
OK No station is activated for EPG.
35
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Switching to the current broadcast
Calling additional information about the programmes
Mark current broadcast.
OK press briefly: switch to current broadcast.
The electronic programme guide will be closed.
INFO: Call up detailed information.
Detailed info
Back
5 ProSieben
16:45 20.12.14
16:30-16:58 How I Met Your Mother
Programme preview
5 ProSieben
Mark desired station in the station list.
OK press long: show preview.
Eine Halloween-Party auf dem Dach seines Wohnhauses steht bevor, und
auch dieses Jahr lässt sich Ted das Ereignis nicht entgehen. Doch eigentlich
hofft er, ein Mädchen, das er vor vier Jahren dort getroffen hat, endlich
wiederzusehen.
Barney findet die Idee völlig dämlich und versucht, seinen Freund zu einer
Party bei Victoria‘s Secret zu überreden. Ted gibt die Hoffnung nicht auf,
doch dann taucht spät abends eine ganz andere Frau auf dem Dach auf
und gesellt sich zu ihm ...
In the top left window, the current programme of
the selected station is displayed now.
View
Jumping to time or station
If there is more information on the selected programme,
it will be indicated here. You find further information
on the indicated programme in the bottom line:
The marking must be in the station list.
Press the numerical key (0 through 9). The window
Select Time/Station is shown.
Today
Select
Alltime
genres
DVB-C
22:00
17:46
10
18:00
19:00
17:30 - 18:00
Unter uns
18:30
12
17:15 - 18:00
Brisant
13
17:29 - 17:59
17:59 - 18:31
18:31 - 19:15
14
16:55 - 17:55
taff
17:58 - 18:29
Die Simpsons
18:29 - 18:58
Die Simpsons
15
17:00 - 18:00
18:00 - 19:00
18:00 - 18:50
Verbotene Liebe
18:45
19:05 - 19:40
Alles was zählt
19:40 - 20:15
18:50 - 19:45
19:15 - 19:59
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
18:58 - 20:14
Galileo
19:00 - 20:00
Select time or station,
Enter numbers.
When entering a time, you always jump to the next
occurrence of the entered time (24-hour window).
If the time is already passed today, the time entered
will appear on the following day.
Always enter five digits for station presets, e.g.
00001 for preset 1 or 00134 for preset 134.
OK Activate jump.
36
The menu item is only available when the selected
programme is on the air.
?????
19:25 - 20:15
Küstenwache
11
View Watch selected TV programme.
20:00
18:00 - 18:50
SOKO Wismar
18:00 - 18:30
Timer list
Memorise Memorise the programme for later watching /
listening. For further information see next page.
This menu item is only available when the selected
programme has not started yet.
Depending on the presetting the TV set will switch
on by itself when it is in standby.
Delete For programmes being memorised you can also
memo delete the memo.
Timer list Call up timer list.
Schedule the recording of the selected programme
(Recording) for a time.
Schedule the recording of the selected programme for
(Favourite) a time. Additionally, an entry to the Home favourites
will be added as soon as the recording starts.
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Recording a programme via EPG
Adapting the EPG Overview
You can programme timer recordings of TV programmes conveniently
using the EPG.
Select day or genre.
OKConfirm selection.
Select the desired broadcast.
Today
17:46
10
News
DVB-C
18:00
19:00
20:00
18:00 - 18:50
SOKO Wismar
18:00 - 18:30
The options to be selected are in the header,
if not, press MENU key.
Today
19:25 - 20:15
Küstenwache
11
17:30 - 18:00
Unter uns
18:30
18:45
12
17:15 - 18:00
Brisant
13
17:29 - 17:59
17:59 - 18:31
18:31 - 19:15
14
16:55 - 17:55
taff
17:58 - 18:29
Die Simpsons
18:29 - 18:58
Die Simpsons
15
17:00 - 18:00
18:00 - 19:00
18:00 - 18:50
Verbotene Liebe
19:05 - 19:40
Alles was zählt
17:46
10
19:40 - 20:15
18:50 - 19:45
19:15 - 19:59
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
18:58 - 20:14
Galileo
19:00 - 20:00
RECORD key: Programme timer recording for the TV
programme.
Timer data dialogue is opened.
News
DVB-C
18:00
19:00
20:00
18:00 - 18:50
SOKO Wismar
18:00 - 18:30
19:25 - 20:15
Küstenwache
11
17:30 - 18:00
Unter uns
18:30
12
17:15 - 18:00
Brisant
13
17:29 - 17:59
17:59 - 18:31
18:31 - 19:15
14
16:55 - 17:55
taff
17:58 - 18:29
Die Simpsons
18:29 - 18:58
Die Simpsons
15
17:00 - 18:00
18:00 - 19:00
18:00 - 18:50
Verbotene Liebe
18:45
19:05 - 19:40
Alles was zählt
19:40 - 20:15
18:50 - 19:45
19:15 - 19:59
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
18:58 - 20:14
Galileo
19:00 - 20:00
Example If you look for the next newscast select and news under
genre. Newscasts will be highlighted.
Back
Timer data - Recording
Adapting the EPG view
Data part 1
Data part 2
Recorder
DR+
Programme
18:00 - 18:50 Verbotene Liebe
Folder
Main folder
Station
Das Erste HD
Date
27.01.2015
Beginning
18:00
End
18:50
Recording type
Once only
PIP: Switch in EPG view between standard and
compact view.
Standard view:
Today
Mon-Fri
Daily
Weekly
Series
17:46
News
DVB-C
18:00
10
19:00
20:00
18:00 - 18:50
SOKO Wismar
19:25 - 20:15
Küstenwache
Record station
Check the timer data and update it if necessary (e.g.
directory, start, end, recording type).
See chapter TV,section Timer for explanations of the
setting options in the Timer data menu.
Select Record station,
OK adopt.
In the EPG a recording symbol
title of the programme.
11
17:30 - 18:00
Unter uns
18:00 - 18:30
12
17:15 - 18:00
Brisant
13
17:29 - 17:59
17:59 - 18:31
18:31 - 19:15
14
16:55 - 17:55
taff
17:58 - 18:29
Die Simpsons
18:29 - 18:58
Die Simpsons
15
17:00 - 18:00
18:00 - 19:00
18:00 - 18:50
Verbotene Liebe
18:45
19:05 - 19:40
Alles was zählt
19:40 - 20:15
18:50 - 19:45
19:15 - 19:59
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
18:58 - 20:14
Galileo
19:00 - 20:00
Compact view:
is placed behind the
Today
17:46
11 ARD HD
Memorising a programme via the EPG
Brisant
p
13 VOX
All genres
19:00
20:00
Küstenwache
Verbotene Liebe
Alles was zählt
Unter uns
A programme that has not started yet can be memorised. For memorised programmes, the TV set will ask at the beginning of a programme
if it should change the channel accordingly or switch on from the
stand-by mode if this is activated in the menu System settings
EPG
TV on when memorised.
Control
p
DVB-C
18:00
SOKO Wismar
10 ZDF HD
p
18:30
mieten, kaufen, wohnen
14 Sat. 1
push - das SAT.1 Magazin
15 ProSieben
taff
16 kabel eins
Navy CIS
Die Simpsons
Die Simpsons
Galileo
17 SPORT1
18 RTL2
X-Diaries
Köln 50667
Berlin - Tag & Nacht
19 SIXX
Emergency Room
Private Practice
Grey‘s Anatomy
Top Dog Model
Mark the desired programme.
OK Call up detailed information.
Mark Memorise,
OK Memorise programme.
In the EPG, a memorise symbol is placed behind the title
.
of the programme
Configuring EPG
You can find the EPG settings in the chapter System settings,section
Control – EPG).
After a software update, it is likely that Memos of
programmes are deleted. After a software update,
please check your timer list (see chapter TV, section
Timer).
37
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Teletext
Teletext
Additional page selection possibilities
Your TV set supports the two operating systems TOP text and FLOF.
Up to 2000 pages are stored in order to get quick access.
First possibility:
Starting and ending Teletext
Second possibility:
INFO: Call overview page 100.
Directly enter the page number.
TEXT: Call teletext.
The function of the TEXT key can be set under
System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ט‬more ... ‫ט‬HbbTV ‫ט‬
Function of the TEXT key.
Third possibility:
The page includes 3-digit page numbers.
The factory default is Standard teletext first (see
also chapter System settings, section Control –
HbbTV).
Mark desired page number.
Back
Das Erste
100
Das Erste
100 ARDtext Do 20.12.14
14:12:42
ARD Text
Syrien: Botschafter läuft über
..
EuGH hebt Saatgut-Verbot auf
....
Bundeswehr:Feldpostaffäre beendet
Neun Tote bei Lawinenunglück .....
107
121
112
142
Live: Ticker, 11.Etappe der Tour.
Galatasaray will Hamit Altintop..
NBA: Kaman spielt mit Nowitzki...
666
211
220
14:00
14:10
15:00
312
Tagesschau
ARD-Mittagsmagazin .....
Tagesschau
14:12:42
ARD Text
Back
100
100 ARDtext Do 20.12.14
Syrien: Botschafter läuft über
..
EuGH hebt Saatgut-Verbot auf
....
Bundeswehr:Feldpostaffäre beendet
Neun Tote bei Lawinenunglück .....
107
121
112
142
Live: Ticker, 11.Etappe der Tour.
Galatasaray will Hamit Altintop..
NBA: Kaman spielt mit Nowitzki...
666
211
220
14:00
14:10
15:00
312
Tagesschau
ARD-Mittagsmagazin .....
Tagesschau
Tagesschau.... 101
Kultur........ 400
Wirtschaft.... 170
Wissen........ 500
Sport..... 200/600
Ratgeber...... 530
Programm...... 300
Inhalt (A-Z).. 790
Wirtschaft
Nachrichten
–
+
Tagesschau.... 101
Kultur........ 400
Wirtschaft.... 170
Wissen........ 500
Sport..... 200/600
Ratgeber...... 530
Programm...... 300
Inhalt (A-Z).. 790
Wirtschaft
Nachrichten
–
+
OK Call page.
TEXT: Switching between Standard Teletext and
MediaText.
Fourth possibility:
The page consists of several sub-pages, indicated by
and the arrows in the bottom line.
the symbol
Pressing the BACK key ends Teletext.
Go to bottom line.
Key functions for Standard Teletext operation
Mark or ,
OK select previous / next sub-page.
INFO press longer: Show Explanation of keys.
The number of the current sub-page is shown
between the arrows.
IINFO or BACK: Hide Explanation of keys.
0-9:
Directly enter the page number.
0 AV:
Stop self changing pages.
9:
Zoom in the page (press several times).
Page selection with the coloured keys
Red key:
One page back or back to previous page
(depending on Teletext provider).
Green key:
Advance one page.
Yellow key:
To next topic.
Blue key:
To next range of topics.
The coloured bars (with TOP text) or the coloured
writing (with FLOF text) in the last to bottom line show
you which colour button you need to use to select which
topic areas and topics.
Page selection with P+/P–
P+ call next Teletext page.
P– call previous Teletext page.
Explanation of the symbols in the Teletext bottom line
Symbol
(icon)
Remote
control key
Description
–
For Teletext pages with sub-pages:
Show previous sub-page.
–
For Teletext pages with sub-pages:
Show next sub-page.
Hide TV picture (Teletext as full screen).
Insert TV picture (Split screen Teletext/
TV Picture).
–
Activate Newsflash mode.
–
Show hidden information on the Teletext
page.
–
Hide information on the Teletext
page again.
Add current Teletext page to the favourites
in Home view.
Call function list with Teletext settings.
38
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Teletext
Newsflash
Some text pages, e.g., live tickers, will be permanently updated. In
order to keep track of changes and also to be able to watch the TV
programme at the same time you may hide the Teletext temporarily
and can still remain informed on updates of the page.
Mark
OK confirm.
Newsflash,
The future behaviour of the News function depends
on the type of the Teletext page:
In case of Full screen Teletext pages the Teletext will
be hidden. In the bottom right corner, there will be a
symbol for the activated news function.
A screen message appears when the contents of the
page has changed.
The Teletext page has
been updated. Would
you like to see it now?
yes
no
Show updated page,
Select yes or no.
OK Confirm selection.
In case of Teletext pages which cover only a part of the
Teletext page, e.g., News tickers, the respective part
will be faded in and permanently updated.
End News function
OK show Teletext again.
Or:
BACK: exit Teletext.
39
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
HbbTV / MediaText
HbbTV / MediaText
Opening HbbTV text directly
HbbTV (1 (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) offers the user
comprehensive multimedia contents, e.g., media centres or additional
information on the current programme as far as they are provided by
the station (Value-added service).
Depending on the programme provider, the direct
Call of MediaText may not be possible. MediaText
must then be opened by means of the HbbTV
application.
MediaText helps you to use the next generation of teletext/videotext
for HbbTV.
MediaText/HbbTV text can either be started directly or through an
HbbTV application.
MediaText/HbbTV text is offered by the selected
channel.
The TV must be connected to the Internet to use HbbTV/MediaText.
A connection speed of at least 6,000 kbit/s (DSL 6000 or
equivalent) is recommended for smooth playback of videos.
Opening an HbbTV application
Connection to the Internet established.
TEXT: Call up “standard” Teletext (see chapter TV,
section Teletext).
By pressing the TEXT key a second time the MediaText/HbbTV Text will be called up.
The function of the TEXT key can be set.
If an HbbTV application is available for the chosen channel after changing channels, this will be loaded during the automatic start process and
a red key symbol will appear. When starting manually, the application
will be loaded not until you press the red key.
The start behaviour can be set under System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ט‬
more ... ‫ט‬HbbTV ‫ט‬Function of the TEXT key (see also chapter
System settings, section Control – HbbTV).
HbbTV is offered by the selected channel.
Connection to the Internet established.
HbbTV mode is set to on.
Red key: Load / display HbbTV application.
Navigation within the HbbTV Text and how the coloured
keys are assigned can vary depending on the provider.
Terminating the HbbTV Text
Pressing the BACK key ends HbbTV text.
HbbTV services for DVB radio
Various DVB radio stations also offer HbbTV text/media text. The
functionality is the same as in TV mode.
The appearance, key assignment and available
functions of the HbbTV applications are dependent on
the provider.
Under certain circumstances, the recording and
bookmarking functions of the applications may not be
supported.
Loewe do not guarantee the accessibility, functionality
or content of HbbTV applications.
Hide / Close HbbTV application
BACK: Hide / Close HbbTV application.
Depending on the set start behaviour, the HbbTV
application will be hidden (automatically) or closed
(manually). In the start behaviour Automatic, you
need to press the BACK key a second time for closure.
You will see a screen message after closing.
(1
Depending on the settings selected.
40
n Connect 32
User manual
TV
PIP
Picture in Picture (PIP)
Selecting the station of the PIP picture
If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not green,
press the green key.
The concurrent display of two different images is referred to as Picture
in Picture.
Select the station as usual. (see also chapter TV,
section Select station).
Starting and ending PIP mode
PIP: Show/hide PIP display.
Select the station for the main picture
Simultaneous display of...
If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not white,
press the green key.
˜ (yes) / – (no)
Select the station as usual. (see also chapter TV,
section Select station).
a digitally broadcast channel (DVB-T/C/S) and
picture from a digital AV source (e.g. HDMI1)
˜
a channel via digital satellite (DVB-S) and a
channel via analogue cable television
–
a digitally broadcast channel DVB-T/C and a
channel over analogue cable television
–
If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not green,
press the green key.
a digitally broadcast channel over DVB-T/C and
a satellite broadcaster (DVB-S)
˜
Yellow key: Swaps contents of TV picture and PIP
picture.
two channels over analogue cable television
–
two digitally broadcast channels (DVB-T/C/S)
˜
a free-to-air and an encrypted digitally broadcast channel (DVB-T/C/S)
˜
two encrypted channels
˜
an SDTV channel and an HDTV channel (DVBC/S)
˜
two HDTV channels (DVB-C/S)
˜
two channels in the HEVC / H.265 standard
–
Coloured key functions
Blue key: Start/stop PIP scan in the PIP picture.
Change PIP position
PIP image is displayed.
3456 Move PIP image to one of the screen corners.
PIP Settings
The size of the PIP display can be set in the System settings under
Control → more ... → PIP (see also chapter System settings, section
Control – PIP).
Picture change and station selection are restricted during recording.
I n PIP mode, it is generally not possible to use analogue stations and
analogue sources (AV, PC IN etc.) for main/PIP picture.
41
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Digital Recorder
Continue (time shift viewing)
TV viewing with time shift
You can use the Digital Recorder of your Loewe TV set to record
programmes on an externally connected USB hard disk.
After you have started the timeshift television, the programme will be
recorded in the background. You can stop the TV programme at any
time and continue watching it later with a time shift. The maximum
time shift is three hours.
Press PLAY key.
Back
2 ZDF 20:15 - 21:45 Rundreise Gardasee
20:47
20.12.2014
Digital
2
During timeshift operation, the programme is not stored permanently.
If you would like to save programmes for a longer time, use the archive
recording (see next page).
Time shift
07:03 min
Recording of analogue stations is not possible.
20:10
20:40
21:10
Time-shifted operation is perhaps not possible or only to a limited
extent for programmes of stations working with CI Plus encryption.
You can now continue watching the TV programme at
the time when you had pressed the PAUSE key.
Interrupt watching (start timeshift television)
Press PAUSE key.
Back
2 ZDF 20:15 - 21:45 Rundreise Gardasee
20:47
20.12.2014
Digital
2
The Playback symbol appears instead of the Pause
symbol.
For further options of time-shift watching see chapter
Video, section Video playback.
Returning to live picture (end timeshift television)
Time shift
07:03 min
20:10
20:40
21:10
Press STOP key.
You see the station’s live picture again.
Switch to a different station
The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR+
status display appears.
At the top you will see the number and name of
the station, start, end and the title of the current
programme.
In the lower part of the screen at the beginning of the
time bar you find the starting time of the background
recording. On the right hand side of the bar you can
see the time at which the time shift recorder will be
full (automatically extends by 30 minutes, up to a
max. 3 hours).
The time above the bar at the PAUSE key shows the
current time.
42
If you switch the channel, the time-delayed recording (time shift) is
restarted. The current time-delayed recording is discarded (time shift
buffer is emptied).
When switching between encrypted and unencrypted contents of the
same station the timeshift buffer is also cleared.
When doing this, the timeshift television is interrupted and you see
the live picture of the broadcast.
As a precaution, start archive recording of interesting broadcasts when
watching stations with changing coding.
Setting bookmarks
You can manually set bookmarks during time-shift TV watching. For
this, the time shift recording is converted into an archive recording.
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Digital Recorder
Archive recording
Viewing another programme from the archive during archive
recording
Programmes that you wish to watch at a later date can be recorded in
the Digital Recorder Archive (DR+ archive) of an externally connected
USB hard disk.
After you have started the recording, you can also watch a programme
you have already recorded.
A recording can be made manually (instant recording / direct
recording) or as timer recording. The timer data can again be entered
manually or more comfortably, for example, via EPG.
If EPG or teletext data is available, the Digital Recorder stores the title
and additional information on each programme in the archive.
Open the DR+ archive.
Mark the recorded programme,
OK view programme.
The recording process is continued in the background.
If additional languages are being transmitted for a DVB broadcast,
these will also be recorded. DVB subtitles can also be recorded.
You can watch another programme or playback a recorded TV
programme from the archive while recording a TV programme into
the archive. But you can also play back the programme that you are
just recording with time-shift.
With multi recording two programmes can be recorded simultaneously
(see chapter TV, secion Digital Recorder – Multi recording).
During the archive recording, the bar showing the recording progress
is red.
Time shift viewing during archive recording
Whilst an archive recording is taking place you can play back the
programme that is being recorded or watch a programme on another
channel using time delay.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
The recording is continued in the background.
Display during time-shift viewing and archive recording:
Recording of analogue stations is not possible.
Recordings of CI Plus encrypted programmes (e.g. RTL HD, Sat 1
HD, Pro 7 HD, etc.) are perhaps not possible or only to a limited
extent.
2 ZDF 20:15 - 21:45 Rundreise Gardasee
Back
21:09
20.12.2014
Digital
2
Instant recording (One touch recording) / Direct recording
With One Touch Recording, the recording starts immediately at the
press of a button. For direct recording, the recording will start only
after entering the recording duration.
The programme will be recorded starting from the point at which
recording was started. If the programme (or a part of it) is in the
timeshift buffer (see left column, timeshift television), this part
is also saved.
One Touch Recording
Time shift
05:00 min
1 Das Erste
20:15
21:04
21:50
PLAY key: Continue playback.
You will now see the time-shift archive recording.
Press REC key longer: The current programme is
recorded immediately.
For further options of time-shift watching see chapter
Video, section Video playback.
Direct recording:
STOP key: End time shift and return to the live picture
of the current archive recording.
Press REC key briefly.
Select recording duration,
OK confirm.
Subsequent archive recording
If desired, adjust timer data (e.g. directory, start, end,
recording type).
You can also save an already viewed and finished broadcast in the
archive provided there has been no change of station in between.
Select Record station,
OK adopt.
Skip or wind back to the desired broadcast and start the recording.
Setting bookmarks during archive recording
Watching other stations during archive recording
After you have started the recording, you can switch to another station.
The second channel can be watched in time-shift TV whilst a
recording is taking place (Time shift during archive recording).
During a running archive recording you can create bookmarks (by pressing the PLAY key a little longer). You will see a message on the screen.
Bookmarks also serve as starting and end points of intervals.
43
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Digital Recorder
Subtitles
Subtitles of a broadcast can also be stored during recording.
The recording of subtitles in DR+ continuous mode must be
activated in the settings.
Calling up the subtitles during a later playback is similar to calling
subtitles in TV mode.
Timer-controlled recording
Comfortably select your favourite programme for recording from the
EPG. The timer overview has room for 50 entries.
You will find further information on timer-recording in chapter Extras,
section Timer.
Switching off the TV set during recording
You can switch off the TV to standby whilst recording. The recording
is continued in the standby mode.
Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do not pull the plug
of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise the recording will be lost!
Stop recording early
You can end a current archive recording prematurely.
Press STOP key.
A message appears in the right upper corner of the
screen.
Stop recording?
yes
no
OK Stop recording.
The recording process is ended. The portion of the TV
broadcast recorded up to this point is saved on the
hard disk and can be played back via the DR+ archive.
You can also end a running recording by deleting the
corresponding Timer entry in the Timer overview
(see chapter TV, section Timer).
44
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Digital Recorder
DR+ archive function list
DR+ archive
With the DR+ archive you have access to all the recorded programmes
and and you can start their playback. In the DR+ archive you can create
your own directories and sort your records accordingly.
The function list of the DR+ archive contains the individual function
for its archive entries.
The menu items available in the function list depend on the selected
entry from archive (programme or directory).
Open the DR+ archive
A
n archive entry has been selected.
Open the DR+ archive.
Select the desired DR+ archive if several available,
OK Display archive entries
The bar above the selected DR+ archive shows
used space on the storage medium or the still
available residual capacity. Below you will find the
page number (e.g. 1/4) of the entries in the DR+
archive.
MENU: Call function list.
...
Detailed info
Sorting
Rename
Multi select
Delete
...
DR+
1/4
Unsere Tierwelt
20:15 - 22:00
20.12.14 ZDF HD
Export
Dokumentation, D 2014
Move
Favourite
Delete
Select desired function,
OK Confirm selection.
Detailed info Show detailed information on the marked archive
entry (see next page).
PIP: switch in DR+ archive view between standard and
compact view. Directories in the default view are
displayed by superimposed preview images and
in the compact view, by an arrow -> in front of the
directory name.
The bar above the preview image or the
programme name shows you how far the
recording has been watched.
...
DR+
1/1
The Big Bang Theory
03.02.15
ProSieben
Richterin Barbara Salesch
28.01.15
SAT.1
************
28.01.15
Das Erste HD
Sturm der Liebe (1850)
02.12.14
Das Erste HD
The Big Bang Theory
22:30 - 22:55
03.02.15 ProSieben
Die Geschenk-Hypothese,
Sitcom, USA 2007
-> Reisedokumentationen
Morgenmagazin
11.06.14
Das Erste HD
Familien im Brennpunkt
13.11.13
RTL Television
Volle Kanne Service täglich 16.03.13
ZDF HD
Blumen der Welt
Das Erste
17.09.12
Playing from the DR+ archive
Select the required archive entry (programme or
directory).
If directory selected:
Open directory,
Select the desired broadcast in the directory,
OK Start or continue playback of the selected
programme.
See chapter Video, section Video playback for
further information.
Sorting Sort archive entries according to certain criteria (e.g.
ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) or according to
recording date (newest entries first).
Rename Changing title of the record or of directory.
Multi select Marking multiple archive entries is possible (see
next page).
Delete Delete archive entry from hard disk and recover
disk space.
Export Copy/move archive entries to an (additional)
externally connected USB storage device or to the
hard disk of compatible Loewe TV sets in the home
network.
If no target medium is available, the menu item is
shown in dark grey.
Move Here, you can move recordings in the DR+ archive to
a directory and create new directories (see chapter
TV, section Digital Recorder – Moving of archive
entries).
Favourite Add archive entry to Home favourites.
See chapter Home view for further information.
Parental Protect recorded broadcast by a four digit PIN against
lock unauthorised playback.
Symbol for the set parental lock:
This menu item appears only when a PIN has
already been defined (see chapter System settings, section Control – Parental lock).
During playback:
P+ call next programme.
P– call previous programme.
Directories are skipped in this case.
Repeat Playing archive entry repeatedly (in a loop) during
future playbacks.
Symbol for set repeat function:
45
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Digital Recorder
Displaying detailed information on the recording
Multi select
If detailed information exists on the recorded broadcast from the EPG,
you can deplay it.
Multiple selection allows to mark several archive entries and then
perform a desired action via the function list (e.g. export, delete).
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
The DR+ archive is opened, multiple selection was
called in the DR+ archive function list.
MENU: Call function list.
Mark Detailed info,
OK Display detailed information on the broadcast.
Back
Detailed info
Select archive entry,
OK Confirm selection (archive entry becomes blue).
Repeat as often as desired.
...
DR+
1/4
Die mehrteilige Dokumentation "Unsere Tierwelt" liefert
Ihnen bisher nie gezeigte, unglaubliche Einblicke in die
heimische Welt der Tiere.
Unsere Tierwelt
20:15 - 22:00
21.09.12 ZDF HD
Unsere Tierwelt
Das Erste HD
20:15 - 22:00
Unsere Tierwelt
Unsere Tierwelt
View
To the right of the preview image you can see a brief
description of the programme content, if available.
Beneath the preview image is the progress bar that
indicates how far the programme has already been
been viewed.
Below the progress bar, information such as station
name, time and date of broadcast, as well as title of
the recorded programme are given.
MENU: Call function list.
Select desired function (e.g. delete),
OK Confirm selection.
The marked archive entries will be deleted.
Deleting recordings from the archive
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
STOP key: Call delete dialogue.
Changing the title of an archive recording or folder
Desired entry (programme or folder) is highlighted
in the DR+ archive.
OK Confirm deletion.
The DR+ archive will be displayed again.
Or:
MENU: Call function list.
MENU: Call function list.
Mark Rename,
OK Call.
Mark Delete,
OK call.
Rename
...
Back
OK Confirm deletion.
The DR+ archive will be displayed again.
Rename
Unsere Tierwelt|
Q
W
E
R
T
Z
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
³
Y
X
C
V
B
N
M
.-/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Space
(2 sec)
OK
Delete
Cancel
...
abc
9
0
Adopt
DR+
3/9
Blumen der Welt (10)
19:00 - 19:45
19.09.12 Das Erste HD
Blumen der Welt (10)
on a letter with a triangle shows more letters
Select characters,
OK Move character to input line.
For further information on character input see chapter
General information on menu operation.
End input with Adopt. This saves the change
permanently.
Or:
BACK: Cancel renaming.
46
It may take some time to delete recordings from
external hard disks, depending on the length of the
programme and recording quality.
To delete a folder, all archive entries in the folder
need to be deleted.
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Digital Recorder
Export of archive entries
Moving of archive entries (folder management)
You can copy/archive entries from an externally connected USB
storage device to another storage medium or to the hard disk of
compatible Loewe TV sets in the home network.
In the DR+ archive, you can create new directories when using the
function move.
If no target medium is available, the menu item is
shown in dark grey.
Copying/moving recordings, which originate from
a CI Plus encrypted station, is perhaps not possible
or only to a limited extent.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
Moving an archive entry to a new folder
Mark Export,
OK call.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
Back
Timer data
Export
It is not possible to nest several directories into one another.
With multiple selection it is possible to move several archive entries
simultaneously to a folder.
MENU: Call function list.
...
Into these directories you can move existing archive entries or do a
new recording directly there.
For this purpose you simply choose the desired directory in the
recording control (timer data).
You can determine the name of the new directory yourself. The DR+
archive root directory has the fixed designation main directory.
Target
EXTHDD
Programme
20.09.12 ZDF HD Unsere Tierwelt
Copy
USB2
Move
MENU: Call function list.
Mark Move,
OK call.
Back
Move
...
Move
Target
Programme
Execute
Reisedokumentationen
20.09.12 ZDF HD Unsere Tierwelt
New folder
Select Target if several are available,
OK adopt.
Select Copy or Move.
OK Start the procedure.
After a successful moving, the recording is
automatically deleted from the source.
Select New folder,
OK call.
The dubbing of archive entries takes place in the
background. You see a screen message, when
copying has finished.
The status of copying assignments in progress/
pending can be seen in the timer list.
The on-screen keyboard will be displayed to enter the
folder names.
The TV set must not be switched off with the mains
switch during the copying process!
Select character,
OK Move character to input line.
For further information on character input see
chapter General information on menu operation.
If the name of the folder is completely entered,
complete with Adopt.
The new folder is created in the DR+ archive and the
selected archive entry is moved into the folder.
Moving an archive entry into an existing folder
Archive entry to be moved to a folder is highlighted
in the DR+ archive.
MENU: Call function list.
Mark Move,
OK call.
Select Target (folder name) if several are
available,
OK adopt.
Mark Execute,
OK adopt.
The selected archive entry is moved to the
selected folder.
47
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Digital Recorder
Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock)
You can lock movies that your children are not permitted to view, for
instance. Playback is then only possible after entering a PIN.
In order to activate the Parental lock, a code number
(PIN) must have been defined beforehand (see
chapter System settings, section Control –
Parentol lock).
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
Mark Parental lock,
OK Call.
...
Parental
lock
yes
Adopt with
OK
no
Select Yes / No,
OK
Adopt.
The titles of locked films in the DR+ archive will be
replaced by asterisks * when a parental lock is active
and thus cannot be read anymore. The detailed
information for the recording cannot be called up.
The cover of the recording will be replaced by a
picture of a lock. In addition, the entry will be labelled
with the symbol .
Viewing a locked movie
The desired locked entry in the DR+ archive is
marked.
...
DR+
1/4
When the access code of the parental lock has not
been entered yet:
OK call entry of PIN.
Enter your PIN.
After the access code has been entered, the lock
of the archive entries will be temporarily released.
OK View film.
48
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Digital Recorder
DR+ Streaming
Follow-Me function
Using the DR+ streaming function you can watch movies with your TV
set (DR+ Streaming Client) from other Loewe TV sets via the home
network. These TV sets (1 must make their DR+ archives available in
the home network (DR+ Streaming Server).
The follow me function enables you to interrupt a current programme
in a TV set (main device) with integrated hard disk and to continue
viewing it with your TV set (secondary device) from the point of
interruption..
To use DR+ streaming, at least two Loewe TV sets are required, of
these, at least one TV set with integrated hard disk (with Chassis
SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx as DR+ Streaming Server).
To use Follow-Me function, at least two Loewe TV sets are required,
of these, at least one TV set with integrated hard disk (with Chassis
SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx).
The TV sets also need to be connected via a network (wireless
connection via Wi-Fi or cable connection via Ethernet, PowerLine).
The TV sets also need to be connected via a network (wireless
connection via WLAN or cable connection via Ethernet, PowerLine).
Archive entries can only be provided or released in the network by
TV sets with integrated hard disks (DR+).
On the main TV set, the function must be enabled (1:
System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬more ... ‫ ט‬DR+ ‫ ט‬DR+ Streaming
‫ ט‬Share DR+ archive with other devices ‫ ט‬yes.
In case of these TV sets which are used as DR+ Streaming Servers,
the DR+ archive must be made available for other TV sets:
System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬more ... ‫ ט‬DR+ ‫ ט‬DR+ Streaming
‫ ט‬Share DR+ archive with other devices ‫ ט‬yes.
Archive entries released in the network can be replayed by all TV
sets with chassis SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx and Chassis MB180.
In case of these TV sets used as DR+ Streaming Clients, access to
other DR+ archives must be enabled:
System Settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬more ... ‫ ט‬DR+ ‫ ט‬DR+ Streaming
‫ ט‬Also use other archives ‫ ט‬yes.
On the target TV set (secondary device), the function must be
enabled:
System Settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬more ... ‫ ט‬DR+ ‫ ט‬DR+ Streaming
‫ ט‬Also use other archives ‫ ט‬yes.
Start Follow-Me function on main device
Press PAUSE key.
Back
2 ZDF 20:15 - 21:45 Rundreise Gardasee
20:40
Functions requiring write access to a device that enables the
recording to be viewed are not available when viewing a DR+ archive
entry over the network.
Such functions are, for example, child protection, delete protection,
renaming, deleting entry or bookmark, setting bookmark, deleting
or hiding parts of the recording.
20.12.2014
Digital
Time shift
00:03 min
20:10
20:40
2
21:10
Playback of DR+ archive entry via the network
Open the DR+ archive.
Select desired archive of the corresponding
device,
OK Display archive entries.
...
Remote TV
1/1
Amazonas
19:15 - 20:15
20.12.14 ZDFinfo
Reise-Dokumentation, D 2014
The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR
status display appears.
Activate Follow-Me
.
You will see a message on the screen.
The archive recording starts in approximately 20
seconds without an entry. The TV set switches itself
off after starting the recording. The broadcast is
adopted into the DR archive.
The recording TV set will make the broadcast available
to the network from now.
You can indicate the beginning of a Follow-Me
recording at the target TV sets in your network by
a screen display.
Select the required archive entry,
OK Play archive entry.
See chapter Video, section Video playback for
further information.
Continue viewing the programme at the second device
Call on the TV set, where you want to view the broadcast, the DR
archive of the recording TV set.
Open the DR+ archive.
Select archive of the recording TV set (main
device),
Display archive entries.
Select Follow-Me recording,
OK View recording.
(1
Only in units with integrated hard disc.
49
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Timer
New instruction: New recording
Timer
In the timer menu you will find the Timer List and the Timer Services.
All programmed recordings, earmarked programmes and copy jobs
are listed in the timer list.
The timer services menu offers you convenient alarm services see
chapter TV, section Timer – Timer Services).
Calling the timer menu
In the Timer list:
Mark Create newly,
OK call.
Mark New recording,
OK call. The function list for recording will be
opened.
Manual recording
HOME: Calling the Home view.
9
Recording
Select TV,
Current programme
9 ZDF HD 20:15 - 21:45
Toskana
Thereby you can record the programme currently being
watched.
20:15
select Timer (at sources),
OK call.
Following programme
9 ZDF HD 21:45 - 22:10
heute journal
Recording via EPG
Or:
Open DR+ Archive
press longer: call the timer menu.
Select Timer list.
Back
Timer
Timer list
Mark the desired option,
proceed.
Timer Services
Mon 22.12.
10:32 - 11:00
ProSieben
How I Met Your Mother
22.12.
12:15 - 12:44
ProSieben
Malcolm mittendrin
22.12.
20:15 - 21:15
RTL Television
Wer wird Millionär?
Mon 23.12.
20:00 - 20:15
Das Erste HD
Tagesschau
Manual Programme the recording manually.
recording For further information see next side.
Current Record currently watched TV programme.
programme For further information see next side.
Add new
All entries
>
Add new You can also programme new recordings, earmark
other programmes and copy pre-recorded
programmes from the DR+ archive to an external
USB hard disk by means of the timer list.
When you have programmed timer recordings,
the TV set can only be switched off to the standby
mode. Never switch the TV set off at the mains
and do not pull out the plug of the TV set out of
the socket. Otherwise no timer recordings can
be made.
When a software update occurs it may happen
that timer entries and memorised programmes
are deleted. After such a software update, check
your timer list.
Explanation of the symbols in the timer list:
Recording
Recording in progress
Marked programme
Repeated recording (daily, weekly or Mon-Fri)
Serial recording
50
Menu item will only be indicated when EPG data
are available for the current station.
Following Record following programme.
programme For further information see next side.
Menu item will only be indicated when EPG data
are available for the current station.
Recording Programme recording of a programme via the
via EPG electronic programme guide (EPG).
For more information refer to chapter TV, section
EPG – Recording a programme via EPG.
Open DR+ The DR+ archive of an externally connected USB hard
archive disk is opened.
For more information refer to chapter TV, section
Digital-Recorder – DR+ Archive.
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Timer
New recording – Manual recording (current station)
In the Timer list, New recording is selected.
Mark recording duration.
The selection of a recording duration programmes
always a recording of the currently viewed station.
For Any station and time see below.
OK Call Timer data dialogue.
The selected recording duration is preset in the
timer data. Check timer data and correct them,
if required. In case of a previous selection of
??? Min, enter definitely the recording duration.
M
ark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
Recording has been started.
New recording – Manual recording (other station)
Manual recording has been selected (see above).
Mark Any station and time,
OK Call Station selection.
Mark desired station,
OK Adopt station in timer data.
Check timer data and correct them, if required.
New copy job
You should copy recordings that you want to save permanently on an
external USB hard disk.
Copying recordings, which originate from a CI Plus encrypted station,
is perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent.
In the Timer list:
Mark Create newly,
OK call.
Mark New copy,
OK call.
The DR+ archive will be called.
For further information for exporting archive entries
refer to chapter TV, section Digital-Recorder –
Export of archive entries.
Record conflict
When programming a new recording, it can happen that there will be
an overlapping with already stored timer recordings. In this case, the
recording conflict dialogue will open.
Here you can determine which of the recordings you want to be
executed, and you must eventually specify which of the programmes
shall be fully recorded and which are cut.
Select recording,
OK change status.
The symbol before the recording shows you what
happens to the recording.
If the status for each recording is ok:
M
ark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
Mark store recordings,
OK call.
The timer data of the recordings will be adjusted
accordingly.
New recording – Current programme
After calling the Current programme the timer data dialogue will be
displayed. The current programme is preset in the timer data.
Check timer data and correct them, if required.
M
ark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
Recording has been started.
Explanation of the symbols in the conflict manager:
TV programme is completely recorded.
Recording is cut off (at the beginning and/or end). Pay
attention to the start and end time of the recording.
The recording is deleted.
New recording – Following programme
After calling the Following programme the timer data dialogue will
be displayed. The following programme of the current station is preset
in the timer data.
Check timer data and correct them, if required.
M
ark Adopt to Timer.
OK Confirm timer data and adopt timer instruction.
51
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Timer
Delete/change programmed timer instruction
Entering the Timer data
Use this function in the timer list if you want to delete recordings
already programmed, to end a running timer recording or to change
a timer instruction.
After selecting the station you wish to record, timer data will be
displayed.
The Timer list is displayed.
The setting options for the timer data differ depending on the way
(EPG, manually) the recording has been programmed.
Timer data - Recording
Mark desired timer instruction,
9
The text of a currently active timer instruction is red.
If you delete this timer instruction, the recording is
stopped.
20:15
Back
Timer
Timer list
Current programme
101 Das Erste HD 20:15 - 21:45
Tatort: Jagdzeit
Timer Services
Mon 24.09.
10:32 - 11:00
ProSieben
How I Met Your Mother
24.09.
12:15 - 12:44
ProSieben
Malcolm mittendrin
24.09.
20:15 - 21:15
RTL Television
Wer wird Millionär?
Mon 25.09.
20:00 - 20:15
Das Erste HD
Tagesschau
Standard settings
Back
Additional options
Recorder
DR+
Programme
20:15 - 21:45 Tatort: Jagdzeit
Folder
Main folder
Station
Das Erste HD
Date
23.07.2014
Beginning
20:15
End
21:45
Recording type
Once only
Mon-Fri
Daily
Weekly
Serial
Record station Detailed info
Update timer data, if required, or press
OK for confirmation.
Add new
Change with
All entries
OK
Delete with
OK Change marked timer instruction.
The timer instruction will be displayed.
Or:
STOP: Delete marked timer instruction.
OKConfirm delete.
Timer instruction will be deleted.
>
Please also read the instructions in chapter System
settings, section Extras – CA module concerning
the recording of encoded programmes.
Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer data –
Standard settings
Folder If available, select the directory into which the
recording will be directly saved.
The DR+ archive root directory has the fixed
designation Main folder.
Default setting: Main folder.
Station Station for which the recording is carried out.
Date Day of recording.
Beginning Starting time of the recording.
End End time of the recording.
Recording Programmes can be recorded in different ways:
type Once only: The programme will be recorded at the
specified time.
Mon-Fri: The programme will always be recorded
from Monday to Friday at the specified time.
Daily: The programme will be recorded every day at
the specified time.
Weekly: The programme will be recorded every week
at the specified time.
Serial (1: A programme running regularly, but
with different start times, can be conveniently
programmed. In this case, the TV set is checking
ervery day at the specified time, whether the
programme is available in the EPG data. If so, the
program is recorded, if not, the next review will be
made the following day.
(1
only available if EPG data exists.
52
„ Connect 32
User manual
TV
Timer
Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer data –
Additional options
Lock Only allow later playback of this recording after enterrecording ing the PIN number (Parental lock).
If a PIN still has not been entered under System
settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬Parental lock, the
Parental lock will at first be activated. See
chapter System settings, section Control –
Parental lock for further information.
Delete Safeguard the recording from being deleted autoprotection matically by using the delete manager.
Timer Services
This menu offers you convenient alarm services. Programmed alarms
are also active when the TV set has been switched off to standby.
If the TV set is switched on from the standby mode by alarm, a screen
message appears. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the
OK key, the TV set switches automatically off again for safety reasons.
The TV set can also be switched off automatically at certain times. A
screen warning appears one minute before automatic switch off. The
automatic switch off can be interrupted by pressing any key.
Call Timer Services
HOME: Calling the Home view.
Auto time Your TV set can use the automatic time control
control (1 (Accurate Recording) for recording a programme.
The automatic time control takes control of the
corresponding monitoring of the start and end time
for DVB stations. The recording is started at the beginning of the broadcast and switched off at the end,
even if the start and/or end time have been changed
by the programme provider.
The automatic time control is not supported by
all stations.
If yes is selected and automatic time control is
not supported by the recorded channel then no
recording is made.
If the programme information (Event-ID) should
not be available any more for the recording of a
programmed broadcast. e.g., due to a programme
change or because the Event-ID has been changed
by the station, the programme cannot be
recorded. The broadcasters alone are responsible
for the transfer of this data for using automatic
time control. The availability of the appropriate
data cannot be guaranteed by Loewe.
Recording Select whether broadcast subtitles are to be
subtitles recorded too.
In case of a direct recording the presetting is
taken from System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ט‬more
... ‫ט‬DR+ ‫ט‬Recording subtitles.
Favourite When selecting yes the recording will be added to
the Home favourites.
Select TV,
select Timer (at sources),
OK call.
Or:
press longer: call the timer menu.
Select Timer Services.
Timer
Back
Timer Iist
Timer Services
Switch off once
no
yes, at ??:??
Switch off daily
no
yes, at ??:??
One-time alarm
no
yes, at ??:??
Wake up Mon-Fri
no
yes, at ??:??
Wake up Sat
no
yes, at 15:??
Wake up Sun
no
yes, at ??:??
Wake up with
TV
Radio
Adopt with
OK
Select the desired setting,
OK change.
OK adopt.
Explanations of the setting options:
Switch off The set switches to the standby mode automatically
once at the specified time.
If a time is specified which has already passed on
the same day, the set switches off at this time the
next day.
Switch off The set switches to the standby mode automatically
daily every day at the specified time.
One time The set alerts you once today at the specified time.
alarm If a time was specified which has already passed on
the same day, the alarm is saved for the next day.
Wake up The set regularly alerts you from Monday to Friday
Mon-Fri at the set time.
Wake up Sat The TV set alerts on Saturdays or Sundays regularly
Wake up Sun at the specified time.
Wake up with Indicate whether the TV set should enter the TV or
radio mode from stand-by during an alarm. The
station, which was last active, is activated.
(1
only available if EPG data exists.
53
„ Connect 32
User manual
Video
Video function list
Video
The item Video gives you access to videos from local (USB, home
network) and online sources.
The video function list contains the individual functions for your videos.
A video source has been selected.
The menu items available in the function list depend
on the currently marked object (data source,
directory, file).
High definition movie material (HD movies) from format 720p
upwards (resolution 1280 x 720 or higher) should be played back
via a wired connection. If there is a wireless connection, then
technical limitations (e.g., fault liability, bandwidth limitations) can
cause disruptions in the playback right up to a complete breakdown
of the playback.
MENU: Call function list.
...
Sorting
Calling video selection
Here you can sort entries according to specific criteria.
Favourite
Video_2.avi
0.68 GB
HOME: Calling the Home view.
Video_3.avi
1.03 GB
Select Video.
Favorites
Video_4.avi
0.04 GB
Video_5.avi
0.29 GB
Sources
Video_6.avi
0.19 GB
Home
TV
Video_7.avi
0.74 GB
DR+
Grey´s Anatomy
Video
DR+ archive
Medianet
Media01
Media_NAS
Video 8 avi
Select desired function,
OK confirm selection.
Audio/Radio
Photo
Tatort
Web
System settings
Select favourite (if any) or source,
OK call.
Sorting Sort media files in the opened directory in alphabetical (ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) order, file size
or date (newest entries first).
Favourite Add marked media file to the Favourites in Home
view.
Possible video sources
The media sources shown here depend on the devices available/
used.
DR+ archive Programmes that you have recorded on an external
hard disk with USB connection using the Digital
Recorder are compiled in the DR+ archive. Via
the DR+ archive you can replay, edit or delete your
recorded programmes.
For further information see chapter TV, section
Digital Recorder – DR+ archive.
MediaNet Call MediaNet.
For further information see chapter Web, section
MediaNet.
USB USB storage media on the USB connections of your
TV set.
The exact designation depends on the relevant
storage medium.
Please also observe the notes regarding USB
sticks in chapter Miscellaneous, section Software update!
TwonkyMedia Examples for media servers in your home network.
WMP11 The exact designation depends on the media server
used.
54
Select video
A video source has been selected.
The directory structure and the form of presentation
of the title selection is dependent on the selected
source.
Select desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
...
USB1
Source: USB1
Title: Video_1.avi
Size: 0.47 GB
Video_2.avi
0.68 GB
Video_3.avi
1.03 GB
Video_4.avi
0.04 GB
Video_5.avi
0.29 GB
Video_6.avi
0.19 GB
Video_7.avi
0.74 GB
Video 8 avi
Select desired video,
OK start or continue playback of the selected video.
See chapter Video, section Video playback for
further information.
„ Connect 32
User manual
Video
Video playback
The description of the following functions applies to the playback of
videos from the DR+ archive as well as for videos from USB storage
media or from media servers in the home network.
Symbol Remote
(icon)
control key
–
Start DR+ Follow-Me recording.
The Follow-Me function enables you to
interrupt a current programme and to
continue viewing at an alternative TV
set from the point of interruption.
For playback of DR+ archive entries you have additional playback
and editing capabilities. The explanation of these functions you find
in chapter Video, section Additional functions for DR+ archive
playback.
Only in time-shift mode.
–
Video status display
Call interval functions.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
The video status display provides you with further options for the
current playback.
Only selectable in pause mode.
–
INFO: Show status display.
Adopt current freeze picture as cover
for the DR+ archive.
Back
DR+ archive : ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
11:27
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
20.12.2014
Digital
Only selectable in pause mode.
2
–
0:00
0:38
Activate / deactivate again the repetition of the currently played archive
entry.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
0:45
–
Switch repetition (loop playback) of all
titles of the current directory ON/OFF.
hh:mm
For playback of videos from USB
storage media or from the home
network.
BACK: Hide the status display again.
–
Description of the symbols in the status display for video playback
Switch ON/OFF repetition (loop playback) of the current title.
The number of available symbols in the status display depends on
the selected video and the video source (DR+ archive, USB, home
network).
Symbol Remote
(icon)
control key
long
For playback of videos from USB
storage media or from the home
network.
Description
Call list view (select video).
hh:mm
–
Change picture format of the video
playback.
–
Skip to desired position in the playback.
Add currently played video to the favourites in Home view.
Set bookmark manually.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
long
Description
Call detailed info on the current playback.
Delete bookmark manually.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
The function is only available when a
manually set bookmark is within five
seconds around the current playback
position.
INFO key: display of detailed info
when status display appears, otherwise call of status display.
Call function list with video settings.
Skip to next bookmark.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
Skip to previous bookmark.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
–
Call dialogue for deleting bookmarks.
Explanation of keys
INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
continued on the next page ‫ט‬
55
„ Connect 32
User manual
Video
Pause playback (freeze picture)
Skipping with Smart jump
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
2
The Smart jump function ensures that the jump width is halved each
time the jump direction is changed or doubled after three jumps in
the same direction (max. 8 minutes). This way you can quickly find a
certain spot of the recording.
The settings for Smart jump you find in the System settings under
Control‫ט‬more ... ‫ט‬DR+ ‫ט‬Smart jump.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
0:38
0:00
2
0:45
hh:mm
0:00
PLAY key: Continue playback.
0:36
0:45
hh:mm
Jump
By briefly pressing the or keys you can skip forwards and backwards in the movie.
The jump distance is adjustable in the System settings under
Control ‫ ט‬more ... ‫ ט‬DR+ ‫ ט‬Jump distance (see also chapter
System settings, section Control ‫ט‬DR+).
Skip forwards.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
2
You are looking for a particular scene in a running
programme:
Depending on your needs, press the key (backwards) or (forwards) briefly several times, to roughly
jump to the area of the programme you are looking for.
If you skipped the desired scene of the programme,
jump in the opposite direction. This jump is executed
in halfs of the jump distance.
If you skipped the desired scene of the programme
again, jump again in the opposite direction. In the
process, the jump distance is cut in half again.
0:00
0:40
By halving the jump distance again when changing
direction you can gradually approach the desired
location.
0:45
hh:mm
Jump by entering a time
You can jump to any position in the video by entering a time.
Skip backwards.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
Show status bar.
20.12.2014
Digital
2
mark hh:mm (Jump to ...).
DR+ Archiv:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
0:00
0:38
0:45
hh:mm
0:00
0:22
0:45
00:22
Enter the desired time with the numerical keys.
OK Execute jump.
56
2
„ Connect 32
User manual
Video
Wind
Repeat
To search for desired scenes in movies you can fast forward and rewind
at three different speeds. Sound is not audible during winding.
Videos can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop. Depending
on the source (DR+ archive, USB storage medium, media server in
the network), single or all videos can be replayed in an endless loop.
or press a little bit longer.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
Repeated playback of DR+ archive entries
2
INFO: Show status bar.
Mark Repeat
OK confirm.
0:00
,
The current archive entry will be replayed repeatedly.
The repetition setting remains active for this archive
entry even when the playback is finished.
0:40
hh:mm
By each brief pressing of or the speed will increase
until you switch back to the first speed.
To deactivate playback again:
Mark Repeat off
OK confirm.
,
The different winding speeds are represented by the
symbols shown below.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
Repeating videos from USB storage media or media servers
20.12.2014
Digital
2
INFO: Show status bar.
Mark Repeat title
,
OK Switch the repetition of the individual video ON/
OFF.
0:00
0:43
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated or another video is replayed.
hh:mm
Or:
In case of time-shift viewing, playback is automatically
activated when the end of the recording is reached.
You are then about 10 seconds behind the live
picture or when rewinding at the beginning of the
time shift recording.
Mark Repeat all
,
OK Switch repetition of all titles of the current
directory ON/OFF.
In case of Fast forward of archive entries, playback
will finish at the end of the recording. The DR+
archive is displayed again.
Repeat title and Repeat all cannot be activated
simultaneously. Using one of the two functions
deactivates the respective other one.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated
or another directory in the overview is selected.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
In the case of Internet videos, please wait until these
are buffered in the memory. This can take a few
seconds, depending on the bit rate of the film and
Internet speed.
57
„ Connect 32
User manual
Video
Select language/sound
Additional functions for DR+ archive playback
Videos, especially those recorded from TV broadcasts, can contain
several sound tracks.
Select sound track/language:
There are additional editing and playback functions for playback
of recorded programmes from the DR+ archive of an externally
connected USB hard disk.
INFO: Show status bar.
Setting bookmarks
Mark Settings
OK Call settings.
,
To retrieve interesting scenes in a movie later, you can manually set the
bookmarks. In addition, there are also automatically set bookmarks
for the start/end of a programme.
Mark Language/sound,
OK call Language/Sound selection.
Language /
sound
stereo
In programmes sent in Dolby Digital 5.1 format, the commercials are
detected and automatically bookmarked at the beginning and end of
the advertising block.
You can select other movie languages and other sound
formats here.
Adopt with
OK
Dolby Digital
2.0
Dolby Digital
5.1
In case of a running time-shift recording (timeshift television), this will
be converted into an archive recording when a blank is set.
PLAY key (press longer): Set bookmark.
You will see a message on the screen. The status bar is
then faded in and you will see the set bookmark above
the bar for the playback.
Automatically set bookmarks are white. Manually
set bookmarks are blue.
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
mark desired sound or desired language,
OK select sound track.
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
2
Changing the picture format
Function is not available for all videos.
0:00
0:38
0:45
INFO: Show status bar.
Mark Change Picture format
OK set picture format.
,
hh:mm
You can choose between small or full image settings.
Small image setting shows the video close to the
original resolution. The video status bar is permanently
shown below the image.
The full image setting enlarges the image to fit the
entire screen. The status bar can be set to visible or
hidden.
Jumping to Bookmarks
INFO: Show status bar.
Mark next bookmark
,
OK Jump to next bookmark.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
0:00
0:41
hh:mm
Mark previous bookmark
,
OK Jump to next bookmark.
Or:
Blue key: Skip to next bookmark.
Gellow key: Skip to previous bookmark.
58
0:45
2
„ Connect 32
User manual
Video
Deleting individual bookmarks
Interval functions
Jump to the manually set bookmark to be deleted.
Back
DR+ archive: ZDFinfo HD 17:05 - 17:50 Flora und Fauna
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
The intervals between manually or automatically set bookmarks
(intervals) can be faded out for future playbacks.
In addition to that, unwanted intervals at the beginning or end of your
recorded broadcast can be deleted.
2
An archive entry is replayed.
INFO: Show status bar.
0:00
0:23
Move to the desired interval in the recorded broadcast
by skipping or winding.
0:45
PAUSE: Stop play.
hh:mm
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
Press PLAY key for a little bit longer: Delete bookmark.
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
2
Deleting the Bookmark during playback
You can delete your manually set bookmarks during the playback of
the DR+ Archive entry.
0:00
Manually set bookmarks are blue, automatically set bookmarks are
displayed in grey. Automatically set bookmarks cannot be deleted.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
Mark Delete bookmark
OK call delete dialogue.
Hide
0:38
Cancel
Delete to start
Delete to end
Mark Interval functions
OK Call interval functions.
,
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
0:45
,
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
Digital
20.12.2014
Digital
0:38
Delete bookmark ←
Delete bookmark →
0:38
0:45
0:45
Hide
Delete all bookmarks
2
2
0:00
0:00
20.12.2014
Cancel
Delete to start
Delete to end
Cancel
Delete all All manually set bookmarks (blue) in the current
bookmarks recording are deleted.
Delete The manually set bookmark to the left of the current
bookmark ← position will be deleted.
Delete The manually set bookmark to the right of the current
bookmark → position will be deleted.
Hiding intervals
The Interval functions are activated.
mark Hide,
OK hide current interval.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
2
OKConfirm selection.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
0:00
0:40
0:45
hh:mm
This interval will be skipped when the archive entry is
replayed in the future.
59
„ Connect 32
User manual
Video
Show hidden sections
A screen message will appear when a hidden section is skipped during
replay of a DR+ archive entry.
Determine cover picture
The covers for the display of the entry in the DR+ archive can be freely
determined by you during an archive replay:
In System settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ט‬more ... ‫ט‬DR+
‫ט‬Notify hidden sections ‫ ט‬yes must be selected.
Jump / wind to the desired position in the recording.
When message appears on screen, select yes,
OK confirm.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
During future replays, the hidden section is displayed
again.
Mark Adopt as cover picture
OK confirm.
,
You will see a message on the screen. The image will
be displayed next to the broadcast in the DR archive
in future.
Deleting part of the recording
An archive entry is replayed.
PLAY key: Resume play.
INFO: Show status bar.
Press PAUSE key at such a position from which the
recording shall be deleted up to the beginning or to
the end.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
Subtitles
When recording a programme, any existing subtitles can be recorded
as well and displayed when playing back.
20.12.2014
Digital
2
An archive entry is replayed.
Subtitles were recorded too (see chapter TV, section
Timer – Entering the Timer data).
INFO: Show status bar.
0:00
Hide
0:38
Cancel
Delete to start
Mark Settings
OK call settings.
0:45
Mark Subtitles,
OK call up available subtitles.
Delete to end
Mark Interval functions
OK Call interval functions.
,
,
Subtitles
Mark Delete to start or Delete to end,
OK confirm.
off
Here you can display the programme subtitles, if they are
provided.
German
Mark Confirm delete
OK Delete part of recording.
DR+ archive:
ZDFinfo HD
17:05 - 17:50
Back
Flora und Fauna
11:27
20.12.2014
Digital
2
Mark the desired subtitles,
OK show/hide subtitles.
0:00
0:38
hh:mm
Deleting intervals
Defined intervals will be deleted when you delete the corresponding
bookmark at the beginning or the end of the interval.
60
Adopt with
OK
„ Connect 32
User manual
Audio/Radio
Audio/Radio function list
Audio/Radio
With item Audio/Radio you find music files from your USB storage
media and media servers in the home network and you access DVB
and Internet radio.
The audio/radio function list contains the individual functions for your
music titles.
An audio source has been selected.
The menu items available in the function list depend
on the currently marked object (data source,
directory, file).
Calling Audio selection
HOME: Call the Home view.
MENU: Call function list.
Select Audio/Radio,
...
Favorites
Sources
Home
TV
Video
BR-KLASSIK
DVB radio
Internet radio
Back to Black
MediaNet
Media_NAS
Media01
TwonkyMedia
Misty Miller
01 Little Thing Called Love
02 Dancing With The Devil
03 Remember
04 Evergreen Love
05 Bones
06 Hope
07 Wild Thing
08 Eve
09 Ollie
10 Home
11 Vampire
02:15
03:42
03:07
03:01
02:42
03:39
03:44
03:40
03:49
03:42
03:29
Sorting
Favourite
Audio/Radio
Photo
Web
System settings
Born to die
Select favourite (if any) or source,
OK call.
Possible Audio/Radio sources
The media sources shown here depend on the devices available/
used.
DVB radio The TV set can receive digital radio stations via DVB.
For further information see chapter Audio/Radio,
section Radio mode (DVB radio).
Internet radio The TV set can receive digital radio stations via the
Internet.
For further information on Internet radio see chapter
Audio/Radio, section Radio mode (Internet radio).
MediaNet Call MediaNet.
For further information see chapter Web, section
MediaNet.
USB USB storage media which are connected to the USB
of your TV set.
The exact designation depends on the relevant
storage medium.
Please also observe the notes regarding USB
sticks in chapter Miscellaneous, section Software update!
Select desired function,
OK Confirm selection.
Sorting Sort media files in the opened directory in alphabetical
(ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) order, file size or
date (newest entries first).
Favourite Add marked media file to the Favourites in Home
view.
Select music title
An audio source has been selected.
The directory structure and the form of presentation
of the title selection is dependent on the selected
source.
Select desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
...
Misty Miller
01 Little Thing Called Love
02:15
02 Dancing With The Devil
03 Remember
04 Evergreen Love
05 Bones
06 Hope
07 Wild Thing
08 Eve
09 Ollie
10 Home
11 Vampire
03:42
03:07
03:01
02:42
03:39
03:44
03:40
03:49
03:42
03:29
TwonkyMedia Examples for media servers in your home network.
WMP11 The exact designation depends on the media server
used.
Select desired music title,
OK Start or continue playback of the selected
music title.
See chapter Audio, section Audio playback for
further information.
61
„ Connect 32
User manual
Audio/Radio
Pause playback
Audio playback
PAUSE key: Stop current playback.
Description of the symbols in the status display for audio
playback
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Back
Back
Hands Open
Chasing Cars
00:00
Hands Open
Chasing Cars
02:56
04:27
Shut Your Eyes
02:56
00:00
Shut Your Eyes
04:27
PLAY key: Continue playback.
Wind
Symbol Remote
control key
Description
Call list view (select music title / station).
You can fast forward music titles at four different speeds. Sound is not
audible during winding.
Press a little bit longer.
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
–
Back
Switch repetition (loop playback) of all
titles of the current directory ON/OFF.
Only for playback of music titles via
USB / Home network.
–
Switch ON/OFF repetition (loop playback) of the current title.
Hands Open
Chasing Cars
00:00
Shut Your Eyes
02:56
04:27
Only for playback of music titles via
USB / Home network.
–
Switch shuffle playback for the titles of
the current directory ON/OFF.
Only for playback of music titles via
USB / Home network.
With each brief pressing of the speed will increase
until you switch back to the first speed.
Available speeds: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x.
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Back
Switch off the TV screen.
Add the current station / music title to
the favourites in Home view.
Show EPG detailed info on the current
broadcast.
Hands Open
Chasing Cars
Shut Your Eyes
00:00
04:10
Only for DVB radio.
Call detailed info on the played music
titles.
Only for playback of music titles via
USB / Home network.
Call function list with audio settings.
Explanation of keys
INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.
62
PLAY key:
Continue playback.
„ Connect 32
User manual
Audio/Radio
Select another title / play current title from start
Shuffle playback
The music titles of your current medium are replayed in random order.
BACK: Call music selection.
Select music title as described in chapter Audio/
Radio, section Selecting music titles.
Or:
,
Mark Shuffle playback
OK Switch shuffle playback of the titles in current
album / directory ON/OFF.
Repeat and Shuffle (see left column) cannot be
activated at the same time. Activating the shuffle
playback deactivates repeat.
Press P+ or briefly:
Play next title of current album / directory.
Press P– or briefly:
Play current title from start.
Switching the screen ON/OFF
Press P– or briefly again:
Play previous title of the current album / directory.
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Or:
Or:
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Go to line with music titles,
scroll in music titles.
Snow Patrol / Eyes Open
Back
Back
Hands Open
Chasing Cars
Shut Your Eyes
02:56
00:00
Hands Open
Chasing Cars
00:00
04:27
Shut Your Eyes
02:56
04:27
Mark Screen off
OK Switch screen off.
OK Start playback of the marked title.
,
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
Repeat
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Music titles can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop.
Press green key.
,
Mark Repeat title
OK Switch the repetition of the individual music title
ON/OFF.
Switch on the screen on the TV set:
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated
or another music title is replayed.
Ending playback
Or:
Mark Repeat all
,
OK Switch repetition of all music titles of the current
directory ON/OFF.
STOP key:
End playback and return to music selection.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated
or another directory in the overview is selected.
Repeat title and Repeat all cannot be activated
simultaneously. Using one of the two functions
deactivates the respective other one.
Repeat and Shuffle (see right column) cannot be
activated at the same time. Activating a repeat
operation deactivates shuffle.
63
„ Connect 32
User manual
Audio/Radio
Radio mode (DVB radio)
The TV set can receive digital radio stations via DVB.
The AUDIO key has been preset to radio mode in the factory.
Explanation of keys
INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.
Switching Radio mode on
AUDIO key on the remote control.
The last used radio mode (DVB or Internet) is called.
Or:
DVB radio function list
MENU: Call function list.
Or:
HOME: Calling the Home view.
Select Audio/Radio.
Select DVB radio,
OK call.
For the first use of DVB-Radio the first station in the
radio station list is called, otherwise the station last
used.
OK Call station list,
call function list.
Select function,
OK call.
See chapter TV, section Function list for further
information.
HbbTV services for DVB radio
Various DVB radio stations also offer HbbTV text/media text. The
functionality is the same as in TV mode. (see chapter TV, section
HbbTV / MediaText).
Switching the screen on/off
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
2 ANTENNE BAYERN
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Certain radio stations show instead of the above
symbol, a station logo.
Press green key.
Switch on the screen on the TV set:
Station switching
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
The radio mode is switched on and a radio station
has been selected (see above).
P+/P– Station up/down.
The number and the station name are displayed
briefly. Also, the status display with time/date and
programme-dependent symbols appears.
Press AUDIO key or
Or:
Or:
TV key: TV mode is called.
Enter the station directly using the numerical keys.
HOME: Calling the Home view.
Or:
Select another operating mode,
OK call.
OK call station list.
DVB-C
...
ASTRA1
19,2°E
2
ANTENNE BAYERN
3
Bayern 3
4
Bayern 1
5
Radio Eins
6
hr1
7
hr2
Select station,
OK call.
64
Exit radio mode
„ Connect 32
User manual
Audio/Radio
Radio mode (Internet radio)
Artist Search (Search for artists)
The TV set can receive digital radio stations via the Internet.
By means of the search for artists, you can quickly and easily see all
radio stations that just play music by this artist. The result list is sorted
for now and most played.
The names of the directories and stations in the Internet radio mode
are given by the provider vTuner. Changing the order of stations or
renaming them is not possible here.
Internet radio is only accessible if a connection to the Internet has
been established.
Switching Radio mode on
AUDIO key on the remote control.
The last used radio mode (DVB or Internet) is called.
Or:
Internet radio station list is opened.
Select search for artists,
OK on-screen keyboard is opened.
Enter name of the band or singer using the
keyboard (see also chapter General
information on the operation, section
Entering characters with on-screen
keyboard),
OK adopt, search is started.
HOME: Calling the Home view.
...
Artist Search
Select Audio/Radio.
Select Internet radio,
OK call.
New search
(Coldplay)
Antenne Bayern
Viva la Vida
Now (15:31)
Bayern 3
Clocks
Now (15:31)
Madhouse Radio
You see the radio station list.
MagicStar
Most played
Most played
Artist Search
Radio Gong
Internet radio
Local
Spreeradio
by Genre
Most played
Most played
Babelsberg Hitradio
by Location
Recommendations
Select station,
OK call.
New Stations
Favorites
Station search
You can search an Internet radio station directly by name using the
menu item Station search. The procedure is similar to the Artist Search
described above.
Mark desired directory,
OK open directory. Repeat procedure if necessary.
Select station,
OK call.
Switching the screen on/off
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Or:
For further information on the control of the Internet
radio see chapter Audio/Radio, section Audio
playback.
Station switching
BACK: call station list.
Select stations as described above. Or:
P+/P– Scroll through the current Internet radio
directory to look for stations. Or:
Keys 2-9: Input the first letter. The station list will jump
to the first station of the corresponding letter.
Explanation of keys
INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.
Internet radio function list
Select Screen off
OK Switch screen off.
,
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Press green key.
Switch on the screen on the TV set:
Press R on the ring cursor on the TV set.
Exit radio mode
MENU: Call function list.
TV key: TV mode is called.
Select function,
OK call.
Or:
See chapter TV, section Function list for further
information.
Select another operating mode,
OK call.
HOME: Calling the Home view.
65
„ Connect 32
User manual
Photo
Photo
Photo function list
Via menu item Photo you can view photos from your local media and
from online sources on your TV screen.
The photo function list contains the individual functions for your
photos.
A photo source has been selected.
The directory structure and the form of presentation
of the photo selection is dependent on the selected
source (example of a menu image: source server
home network).
Calling Photo selection
HOME: Calling the Home view.
The menu items available in the function list depend
on the currently marked object (data source,
directory, file).
Select Photo.
Favourites
Sources
Home
MENU: Call function list.
TV
Video
CRW_0172b
CRW_0533b
Medianet
USB1
...
Picture_025
Slide show
Picture_026
Sorting
Picture_027
Favourite
Picture_039
Photo
Audio/Radio
Photo
CRW_0652b
CRW_0457b
Media01
Media_NAS
Web
Picture_040
System settings
CRW_0284b
Media02
Picture_045
Picture_046
Select favourite (if any) or source,
OK call.
Picture_047
Pi t
Possible photo sources
The media sources shown here depend on the devices available/
used.
MediaNet Call MediaNet.
For further information see chapter Web, section
MediaNet.
USB USB storage media on the USB connections of your
TV set.
The exact designation depends on the relevant
storage medium.
Please also observe the notes regarding USB
sticks in chapter Miscellaneous, section Software update!
048
Select station,
OK call.
Slide show Start slide show of the photos in the currently selected
directory (see next page for further information).
Sorting Sort media files in the opened directory in alphabetical
(ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) order, file size or
date (newest entries first).
Favourite Add marked media file to the Favourites in Home view.
Photo Here you can do frequently used picture settings
(Slide show speed, Crossover, Automatic rotate).
Select photo
TwonkyMedia Examples for media servers in your home network.
WMP11 The exact designation depends on the media server
used.
A photo source has been selected.
The directory structure and the form of presentation
of the photo selection is dependent on the selected
source (example of a menu image: USB source).
Select desired directory,
OK open directory.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
...
Pictures
Source: USB1
Title: CRW_7266b
Date: 19.07.2013
Size: 4036 KB
Select desired photo,
OK View photo zoomed to full screen.
See next page for further information – Photo
display.
66
„ Connect 32
User manual
Photo
Full-screen mode
Photo display
A photo is highlighted in the selection (list view).
Description of the symbols in the status display for photos
OK View photo in full-screen mode.
USB1 -> CRW_7266b
Back
USB1 -> CRW_7266b
Back
Show previous / next photo.
Symbol Remote
(icon)
control key
Description
–
Call list view (select photo).
–
Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left.
–
Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the right.
Rotating the photo
Fade in photo status.
Mark
or
.
OK Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left/right.
USB1 -> CRW_7266b
Back
Start slide show.
Pause current slide show.
short
Show previous photo.
short
Show next photo.
Add currently displayed photo to the
favourites in Home view.
Slide show
Call detailed info on the displayed photo.
Call function list with photo settings.
PLAY key:
Start slide show.
USB1 -> CRW_7268
Back
Explanation of keys
INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.
PAUSE key:
Pause slide show.
PLAY key:
Continue paused slide show.
Photo in full-screen mode / exit slide show
STOP key:
Full-screen mode / end slide show and
return to photo selection.
67
„ Connect 32
User manual
Web
Web
MediaNet
Here you have access to multimedia content in the Internet (MediaNet)
as well as a high-quality web browser.
Call MediaNet
To use the full functionality of MediaNet, the TV set
must be connected to the Internet.
Calling the Web selection
WEB: Call MediaNet (1.
HOME: Calling the Home view.
or
Select Web.
Favorites
HOME: Call Home view.
Sources
Home
TV
Video
Select Web.
THE LIBERATION OF ART
Loewe channel
LUMAS
MediaNet
Browser
Audio/Radio
Select MediaNet,
OK call.
Photo
YouTube
Web
System settings
Deezer
Aupeo
Home
MediaNet - Home
Browse
New
Settings
Imprint
Select favourite (if any) or source,
OK call.
Recommendations
Possible Web sources
MediaNet Under the menu item MediaNet you will find a
continually expanding platform for interactive TV
applications from the Internet (see next column).
All applications are optimised for use on the TV.
The upper portion of the MediaNet home screen
contains new online content.
The lower portion of the MediaNet home screen
contains Recommendations given by Loewe.
Browser Call Web browser of the TV set.
The given content may change from time to time
without prior notice.
For further information see chapter Web, section
Browser.
Select Home,
OK go to the right to choose the online content.
Mark the desired online content,
OK Display/play content.
The navigation within the various applications
depends on the provider.
Functions in the MediaNet home screen
Home Displays the MediaNet home screen with a choice of
new online content and recommendations.
Browse Under Browse you can list and call the online content
by subjects.
Settings In the Settings for MediaNet you can select
countries, for example, to take advantage of various
services.
Imprint Providing the legally required information on the
parties responsible for the content.
Exit MediaNet
HOME: Call Home view and select another function.
(1
The assignment of these keys can be changed (see chapter System settings, section Control – Web key function).
68
„ Connect 32
User manual
Web
MediaNet – Browse
Define application as favourite
Under the item Browse, you browse the full range of applications by
topic.
MediaNet-Browse is called.
Mark the desired application.
Add the marked application to the Home favourites.
Back
All
MediaNet - Browse
Recommendations
All
The favourite is added to view Home of web favourites
and queued at the end.
Video
Photo
MediaNet – Settings
Service
Here, you can find setting options for MediaNet.
Games
MediaNet settings are called.
Entertainment
News
Back
Country Selection
MediaNet - Country Selection
Select Countries to display various services
Imprint
Filtering applications
Select the genre / topic,
OK call applications of the genre.
Germany
Belgium
Austria
Netherland
Switzerland
Luxemburg
France
UK
Italy
Denmark
Spain
Sweden
Portugal
Finland
Service
Games
MediaNet - Browse
Entertainment
Games
News
Select the desired setting,
OK call.
Sport
Music
Country Select countries from which you want to get
Selection information on services (see below).
Select desired application,
OK open application
Imprint Providing the legally required information on the
parties responsible for the content.
Country Selection
Change filter
Go to column with genres / topics.
Mark country,
OK select / deselect country.
S
elect another genre / topic,
OK call applications of the selected genre.
Various services (applications, etc.) from countries
that are marked with a tick are offered in MediaNet.
Exit Settings
Exit Browse
BACK: Return to the MediaNet home screen.
BACK: Return to the MediaNet home screen.
Or:
Or:
Go to column with genres / topics.
Go to column with settings.
Select Back,
OK return to the MediaNet home screen.
Select Back,
OK return to the MediaNet home screen.
69
„ Connect 32
User manual
Web
Browser
Entering a URL (Internet address)
You can access Internet sites directly using the integrated Opera
browser. The web browser can also be used without an Internet
connection. Thus you can access local devices which provide a web
interface (e.g., router, home control, home network server).
Browser status is displayed.
Mark the URL (Internet address) of the
indicated Internet site,
OK Open address entry box.
Calling the Web browser
Enter/change internet address
HOME: Calling the Home view.
Back
http://www.loewe.tv
Select Web,
Select Browser,
OK call.
Start page will be opened.
Adopt
(2 sec)
OK
q
w
e
r
t
z
u
i
o
P
a
s
d
f
g
h
j
k
l
I
y
x
c
v
b
n
m
.-/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
www.
.de
Space
Delete
.com
Cancel
.net
ABC
9
0
.
/
Adopt
Cancel
on a letter with a triangle shows more letters
Select required character,
OK Accept character.
In the event of letters with a triangular, additional
letters are displayed when pressing the OK button
longer (2 sec).
Å Delete character to the left of the cursor.
INFO: display browser status.
.-/ The selection switches to special characters.
abc Switch between upper/lower case.
Explanation of the symbols in the browser status
Update the displayed Internet site.
Define current site as homepage.
Space Enter blank space.
Delete Delete all characters.
Cancel Cancel input. The entry box will be closed and the
previous Internet site will be displayed again.
100% Change zoom factor of the displayed site / browser.
Accept Accept address and open new Internet site.
Add displayed Web site as favourite to Home view.
The characters may also be entered by the USB
keyboard or the numerical keys of the remote control
(see left column).
Navigation on Web sites
P+/P– Scroll page vertically.
Exit Browser
Web site is displayed. Browser status is hidden
/ Scroll page horizontally.
Mark the link or text entry box with blue
selection frame,
OK open link or confirm text input.
For the entry of text, press a numerical key (0-9)
repeatedly as with a mobile phone until the desired
character appears. The available letters are printed on
the individual numerical keys.
Yellow key: Delete character.
BACK: Stop text entry and exit entry box.
70
HOME: Call Home view and select another function.
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
System settings
Under the menu item System settings in the Home menu you find
all settings and adaptabilities of your TV set.
Calling System settings
HOME: Call Home view.
Select System settings,
OK call.
Picture
Here you can adjust among other things: Contrast, colour,
brightness, picture adjustment, sharpness, picture format.
Sound
Station
Control
Multimedia
/ Network
Connections
Extras
Menu items Stations:
Automatic scan TV+Radio, Manuell scan (incl.
antenna status), Station lists TV, Station lists Radio,
Update station list automatically, Transfer all station
lists.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Stations.
Control In this menu you find settings for additional functions
of your TV set like EPG, picture in picture (PIP), digital
recorder (DR+) as well as interfunctional settings
like time and date, parental lock or software update.
Menu items Control:
Language, Parental lock, EPG, Energy efficiency,
Quick start mode, Software.
Menu items Control ‫ט‬more ...:
On-screen displays, Time and date, DVB settings,
PIP, DR+, Standard Teletext, HbbTV, Hard disks,
Export log file, WEB key function.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Control.
Or:
Press MENU key longer: call System settings.
Explanations of the setting options:
Picture Here you do the settings referring to the representation of the picture signal on your TV set.
Menu items Picture:
Picture adjustment, Contrast, Brightness, Color
intensity, Image+ Active, Picture format.
Menu items Picture ‫ט‬more ...:
Colour temperature, Sharpness, Move picture up/
down, Auto dimming, Film quality improvement
(DMM), Digital Noise Control (DNC), Skin tone,
Deblocking filter.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Picture.
Sound Under this menu item you find the settings for sound
playback.
Menu items Sound:
Sound adjustment, Loudness, Sound picture synchronisation, Volume adjustment.
Menu items Sound ‫ט‬more ...:
Auto volume, AV output signal, Maximum volume,
Maximum switch on volume, Balance.
The available menu items may vary and depend
on the connected audio component.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Sound.
Stations Move and delete TV and radio stations. In addition
to that you can automatically and manually update
the complete station list. Your stations can also be
arranged and optionally sorted in personal lists.
Multimedia / By means of the Multimedia / Network menu you
Network configure your network adaptor and network access.
By means of the menu item renderer you can allow
external devices to access your TV set (renderer) via
app to render (play back) contents there.
Menu items Multimedia / Network:
Network settings, Multimedia settings, Renderer.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Multimedia / Network.
Connections Use this menu to configure the TV set for operation
with external devices.
The sound component wizard leads you comfortably
through the configuration of your used audio
equipment such as speaker systems or HiFi/AV
amplifiers.
For more information, refer to the instruction manuals of the equipment used.
Menu items Connections:
Sound components, Antenna DVB, AV connecting
settings, Digital Link, Gaming mode.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Connections.
Extras Under this menu item you can display the features
of your TV set, repeat the initial startup or reset the
device to the factory settings.
Also, DR+ streaming can be enabled, by means of
which the TV set provides the contents of the DR+
archive on the network.
Menu items Extras:
DR+ Streaming, Integrated features, Repeat initial
installation, Reset to factory settings.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Extras.
71
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Picture
Picture
Here you do the settings referring to the representation of the picture
signal on your TV set.
Calling picture settings
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Picture,
go to next column.
Picture
3D
If your desired display format has not been automatically
selected then you can choose it in the 3D settings menu.
You may display the 3D image in 2D or vice versavice versa.
Picture adjustment
Contrast
Brightness
Colour inten
Image+
Active
Picture format
Colour Here, you can give the TV picture a warmer or colder
temperature hue according to your personal taste.
Sharpness Here you can adjust picture sharpness to obtain the
best definition.
Move picture In various picture formats, font or graphic insertions
up/down are not or only partially visible at the bottom or at
the top.
You can move the picture up or down with the up/
down menu control keys to make the displays visible.
Menu item only available in the picture formats
panorama or zoom.
Auto One automatic dimming functions are available here
dimming which enable you to adapt the TV picture to the room
brightness, improve the visual contrast and reduce
the power consumption of your TV.
Depending on the environment (OPC):
The contrast of your TV picture is automatically
reduced vs. decreasing room brightness (Optical
Power Control – OPC).
more ...
Select desired picture function,
proceed to next column.
Explanations of the picture settings:
Film quality DMM reduces jolt in rapid picture object movements
improvement and rolling text displays. This applies especially for
(DMM) movies.
Picture You can switch between several fixed picture
adjustment adjustment modes and the personal picture values
that you have set here.
Digital Noise With active DNC (Digital Noise Control) you can
Control (DNC) eliminate or reduce picture noise.
See chapter System settings, section Picture –
Picture adjustment for further information.
Skin tone Adjust the skin tone so that the most natural facial
skin colour is achieved.
Contrast The contrast setting depends on the brightness of
the room. The brighter the surroundings the higher
the contrast should be set.
The power consumption of the TV set depends
directly on the value set here.
Gamma If image seems over- or underexposed, you can
brightness adjust it here accordingly.
correction
Brightness Set the brightness so that the black areas of the
picture only just appear black.
Colour Set the colour intensity to suit your personal taste.
intensity The colours should appear natural.
You can pinpoint this by the colour of peoples‘ faces
for example.
Image+ Image+ Active is a special picture improvement
Active developed by LOEWE which provides a detailed and
contrasting, sharper, natural and true colored picture
which is rich in detail and contrast.
Picture Select the format so that the screen is used to the
format fullest possible extent without affecting the natural
proportions.
See chapter System settings, section Picture
– Selecting the picture format for further
information.
more ... call with OK (see right-hand column).
72
Auto format When auto format is switched on, the TV set
(AMD) recognizes the picture format for Cinemascope or
widescreen films and adjusts itself accordingly.
Deblocking To minimise the visible interference to the picture
filter caused by modern compression methods for images
and image sequences (formation of small blocks),
a so-called deblocking filter can be activated which
counteracts this interference.
PC IN For some PC image formats, horizontal as well as
display vertical position and the phase position of the image
can be corrected.
For more information, see chapter System settings, section Picture – Selecting the picture
format.
Menu item only available if there is a valid PC signal
via the VGA adapter at the AV connection.
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Picture
Picture adjustment
Selecting the picture format
By selecting one of the preset picture adjustment modes (Home
Mode, Premium Mode, Cinema Mode or Shop Mode), the picture
settings for the respective currently active signal input group are set
to predefined values.
You can use Personal Mode to specify individual settings for contrast,
colour intensity, colour temperature, sharpness and digital noise
suppression. Here you can enter your own specifications for each
signal input group.
You find a listing of the various signal input groups in chapter Technical
Data, section Signal input groups.
The setting options depend on the transmitted picture content.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Picture,
go to next column.
Mark Picture format,
go to next column.
...
Calling picture adjustment
Picture format
16:9 TV
16:9 PC
HOME: Call Home view.
This 16:9 TV mode enables a proportionally correct display
of 16:9 pictures. You select this mode when the picture
signal is not supplied by a PC (normal case).
16:9 Zoom
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
4:3 TV
4:3 PC
Mark Picture,
go to next column.
4:3 Zoom
Mark Picture adjustment,
go to next column.
...
Picture adjustment
Home Mode
Premium
Mode
The priority here is low energy consumption in home use.
In this case the TV switches off automitically for the sake
of saving energy, after it has been out of operation for four
hours.
Adopt with
OK
Cinema
Mode
Select format,
OK adopt selected format.
Explanations of the picture formats for HD signals:
Shop Mode
Personal
Mode
Select mode,
OK adopt selected mode.
When selecting one of the three preset picture
adjustment modes you have to specify additionally
if the mode shall be set only for the currently
selected signal source, e.g., Only for HD Digital or
for the entire TV.
Explanations of the picture adjustment modes:
4:3 TV Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9
16:9 TV broadcasts. You select this mode when the signal is
not supplied by a PC (normal case). A small part of
the picture is truncated. This may be necessary to
hide possible interference at the edge of the picture,
which arises from the signal supplied.
4:3 PC Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9
16:9 PC broadcasts without loss of information.
You select this mode when the signal is supplied
by a PC.
4:3 Zoom Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture
16:9 Zoom magnification. Displayed text may get lost.
Explanations of the picture formats for SD signals:
16:9 Proportionally correct display of 16:9 broadcasts.
Home Mode The emphasis for the picture settings is here on low
energy consumption for home use. In this case, the
TV set switches automatically off after 4 hours of
unattended time.
Premium The picture settings in Premium Mode are optimised
Mode for a brighter environment at the cost of higher
energy consumption.
Cinema The cinema mode is optimised for video and photo
Mode playback.
Shop Mode The picture settings in Shop Mode are adjusted to
operation in the presentation room.
Personal Here, you can recall your last personal picture
Mode settings.
4:3 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts.
Panorama 1 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts on
the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles remain
visible.
Panorama 2 Format filling display (factory default) of 4:3 broadcasts on the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles
remain visible.
Zoom Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture
magnification. Displayed text may get lost.
PALplus Is a 4:3-compatible 16:9 picture broadcast supplied
by the station which is detected automatically.
73
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Sound
Sound
Explanations of the sound settings (continued):
Calling the sound settings
Loudspeaker/ For analogue stations:
Headphone Selection options for Mono/ Stereo or Sound 1 or
sound Sound 2 for bilingual programmes, separately for
the loudspeakers and the headphones.
The selectable menu items depend on the selected station and the
connected sound components.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Sound,
go to next column.
Sound
Sound via
Here you can choose whether you would like to hear
the sound via the TV speakers or via the sound projector.
Sound
adjustment
Loudness
Sound picVolume adjustment
more ...
Select sound function,
proceed to next column.
Explanations of the sound settings:
Sound via Playback over the TV speakers or an external hi-fi
amplifier.
The menu item Sound via only appears if HiFi/
AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable) is
set in the audio components wizard (see chapter
System settings, section Connections – Sound
components).
Sound Here, you can adapt preset sound characteristics
adjustment of the respective broadcast. Selectable are, e.g.,
Speech, Classical, Pop, Custom music and Film
soundtracks. For personal music and film sound you
can do the settings for pitch and bass sound (high
and low frequencies).
Loudness Proper boost of bass and treble tones at low volume.
Sound
picture
synchronisation
If the sound and picture are not precisely in sync,
you may correct this here. Move the mark on the
bar downwards, slowing down the sound compared
with the picture. Move the mark upwards, speeding
it up compared with the picture. Time adjustment
of the sound occurs in steps of 10 ms in each case.
only available for DVB stations.
Volume The volume can differ according to the individual staadjustment tions. If the sound is too loud or too quiet in relation
to other stations, adjust the volume.
When the menu is open, you can select the stations
one after another with P+/P– and adjust every
single station conveniently.
more ... call with OK.
74
Auto volume The volume may vary when receiving stations with
different standards, when switching from station to
station or during commercials.
You can reduce these differences in volume by
selecting auto volume on. For music and live
broadcasts you get a better sound spectrum with
auto volume off.
Maximum You can limit the volume adjustment of the
volume loudspeakers. This prevents selecting a volume
which is too loud.
Maximum Set the sound level to be heard after switching on the
switch on TV set with the mains switch or after a power failure.
volume When switching on the TV set in standby mode, the
volume last used is retained unless it was above this
switch-on level. Otherwise it is limited by this.
Balance Set stereo balance so that the volume impression is
identical on the left and right.
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Stations
Stations
Under the item Stations you find all settings concerned with station
search for TV and DVB radio as well as functions for creating and
editing the various station lists.
Station management is not possible as long as a programmed timer
recording is active.
If at least one station is locked, the access code must be entered
prior to automatic search.
The procedure for radio stations or Station lists Radio is similar to
that for TV stations or Station lists TV. Therefore, this procedure is
described only for TV stations.
Call Stations menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
In this mode you open a wizard which automatically
searches and saves all the TV and radio stations. Please
follow the instructions in the dialogues below.
Stations
Station lists
TV
Station lists
Radio
Update station list auto
Select desired function,
proceed to next column.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Stations menu:
Automatic Here you start the wizard that searches and stores
scan all TV and DVB radio stations (see chapter System
TV+Radio settings, section Stations – Automatic scan
TV+Radio).
Manual scan Here, you can enter all the settings available for a
(incl. TV station (see chapter System settings, section
antenna Stations – Manual Scan TV / Radio).
status)
Station lists
TV
Station lists
Radio
Here you can move and delete TV stations/ DVB
radio stations in all lists.
You can put together your most frequently watched
programmes in one or more lists of personal
favourites (see chapter System settings, section
Stations – Station lists TV / Radio).
Update If the channel list is not up to date, it will be updated
station list automatically, provided the parameter Allow is
automatically selected (see chapter System settings, section
Stations – Update station list automatically).
Transfer all Here you can export or import all station lists of this
station lists TV set (see chapter System settings, section
Stations – Transfer all station lists).
75
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Stations
Automatic scan TV+Radio
For automatic scan TV+Radio, a search wizard will be started that
searches for new stations which are not yet stored.
You have to repeat the initial installation and
automatically search for new stations if you want to
delete all the existing stations and automatically
search for new ones.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Automatic scan TV+Radio,
go to next column.
In the upper info text the current search settings will
now be displayed:
SEARCH WIZARD - Check search settings
...
Your TV carries out the update of the station list (search for new stations; delete
stations no longer broadcast) with the following settings:
Location of TV set
Signal source
Change search settings
D Germany
Cable analogue
Start search/update
End with
Explanations of some search settings (continued):
DVB-T/C/S If several networks are available, you can decide
Network which network you want to receive your channels
selection from.
DVB-T/C/S With the selection of set location the conventional
Settings settings will be preset. Only change these defaults
if you are familiar with other parameters.
Scrambled stations: (DVB-T/C/S)
You can state whether scrambled stations are to be
searched for in the search/update. If you select yes,
coded stations will also be searched for. However,
these stations can only be received in connection
with a CA module and the appropriate Smart Card.
Ask your dealer which Smart Card you need to
receive certain stations.
Search method: (DVB-T)
If you want to run the station search independently
of the channel grid, select Frequency search for
the search method.
Search method: (DVB-C)
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, only the stations which the networks supply are searched - either for all receivable networks
or only for the particular network specified under
Network ID.
Network ID: (DVB-C)
If you want to change these search settings:
Select Change search settings,
OK
wizard guides you through the search settings
(see column on the right).
If you agree with these settings:
Select Start search/update,
OKstart scan.
BACK: Cancel current search/update.
Explanations of some search settings:
Signal source Select cable (analogue), DVB-T, DVB-C or DVB-S
depending on which signal source you want to search
for new stations.
Use the Antenna wizard to call the configuration of
the DVB-T and DVB-S antennas.
Calling up the DVB antenna configuration causes
the Change search settings dialogue to be quit.
You must call up the dialogue again after finishing
the configuration.
Cable
(analogue)
TV/colour
standard
76
With the selection of TV set location the conventional
TV standard/colour standard is the default.
It should only be changed if stations with other
standards are to be searched.
If you select none here, DVB signals of all current
broadcasting networks are scanned automatically
(recommended for most cable networks).
If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID
(necessary in the cable networks of some countries),
only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are
searched for automatically. Your cable provider has
the information you need.
Search method: (DVB-S)
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, from all receivable networks all the stations
are searched which are supplied by these networks.
Accept Logical Channel Number: (DVB-T/C/S)
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T/C/S) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Stations
Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer
found stations
The number of new TV stations found is displayed after the automatic
search / update has been completed.
Proceed. The number of new radio stations found
is displayed.
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However,
this requires detailed knowledge.
The manual search of radio stations is similar to that of TV stations.
Therefore, the manual search for radio station is not dealt with
separately.
Calling manual search
Call list of new TV stations found.
HOME: Call Home view.
Newly found stations
...
Manual Scan TV / Radio
All newly found TV stations which are marked with a are then saved. With the
button, you can set or remove the marking.
Note: The newly found stations which you have already deleted are not marked.
3sat HD
ANDALUCÍA TV
arte
a.tv
ANIMAX
ARTE
Achtung Singles TV
ANIXE HD
ARTE Francais
Aktiv Direkt TV
anixe iTV
ARTE HD
Al Jazeera
ANIXE SD
Astrocanal TV
Al Jazeera English
ARD
Astro TV
Amore TV
ARIRANG TV
ATV+
OK
Proceed with
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Manual Scan TV,
OKcall Manual Scan.
Manual scan (incl. antenna status)
...
Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
Stores the marked TV stations.
Back
Signal source
Cable analog
DVB-T
TV standard
B/G
I
D/K
Colour standard
PAL
SECAM
Channel
E 01
S 01
Frequency
196.27 MHz
Name
Das Erste HD
L
DVB-C
DVB-S
M
Search
The list of new radio stations found is displayed.
Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
Proceed.
Afterwards, a list of the stations which are saved but
which are temporarily not broadcasting or no longer
exist is displayed, if available.
The number of the memory location used is displayed
in front of the station. Please select the stations you
really want to delete.
Stations no longer found (TV)
...
The following stored TV stations were no longer found because they are not currently
broadcasting a programme or no longer exist. All TV stations marked with a
are
subsequently deleted. The unmarked stations are retained.
You can set or remove the marking with the OK button.
Channel TV
Press TV
Direct 3
iM1
Direct 4
Direct 5
GoTV
ATV+
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However, this requires detailed knowledge.
Select the menu item Signal source to decide in which
area you want to search for stations.
Depending on the selected source, various setting
possibilities will be available.
On the next page, the settings for analogue cable and
DVB-T/C/S sources are described separately.
Status bar for manual search
Status bars are displayed for manual search, which
show the reception quality of the individual stations
during the station scan. The markers in all bars should
preferably be in the green area.
Station name
Das Erste HD
BVN
Proceed with
Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
Proceed. The marked stations will be deleted. The
list of radio stations no longer found is displayed.
Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
End search wizard.
C/N
40.0 dB
Level
68 dBμV
BER
0 E-7
C/N: (Carrier/Noise) The bar shows the signal-tonoise ratio. The value indicated in dB should be
preferably high.
Level: The bar shows the receiving level of the station.
The value displayed in dBμV should be preferably high.
BER: (Bit Error Rate) The bar shows the bit error rate
of the station. The value for BER should be as low as
possible.
77
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Stations
Manual search for cable analogue (analogue cable reception):
Manual search is called.
Manual DVB-T/C/S search:
Manual search is called.
Cable analogue has been selected as signal source.
...
Back
DVB-C
DVB-S
Signal source
Cable analog
Frequency
330.00 MHz
Signal source
Cable analog
DVB-T
TV standard
B/G
I
D/K
Colour standard
PAL
Channel
E 01
Frequency
196.27 MHz
Name
Das Erste HD
C/N
40.0 dB
Level
68 dBμV
BER
0 E-7
L
Back
Manual scan (incl. antenna status)
...
Manual scan (incl. antenna status)
M
QAM modualtion
256
SECAM
Symbol rate
6900
S 01
Netzwork
Standard
Station name
Das Erste HD
Search
DVB-T
DVB-C
DVB-S
Search
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However, this requires detailed knowledge.
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However, this requires detailed knowledge.
Mark and adjust settings,
OK confirm as the case may be.
Mark Search,
OK start search.
Mark and adjust settings,
OK confirm as the case may be.
Mark Search,
OK start search.
When a DVB transponder has been found:
If a station has been found:
Mark Store/Overwrite,
OK store station.
Explanations on the search settings for cable analogue:
Found stations
...
Back
1
Das Erste HD
32 tagesschau24
13
arte
54 Phoenix
14
Einsfestival
87 ARD-alpha
20
WDR Köln HD
26
EinsPlus
Search Store/Overwrite
Mark/unmark with OK
Signal source Selection of range in which you want to search for the
station.
TV standard If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to
select for specific channels or AV equipment.
Colour If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to
standard select for specific channels or AV equipment.
Channel Direct input of channel.
Frequency Direct input of station frequency.
Range for entry: 044.75 MHz - 859.25 MHz.
Name Here, the name of the found station is displayed. You
can change the name of the station.
Mark the station,
OK Station will be ticked with . If necessary,
repeat for several stations.
Stations that already exist in the station overview
will be displayed with their station number on the
left.
Mark Store/Overwrite,
will be stored.
OK Stations marked with
Explanations of some search settings:
Signal Selection of range in which you want to search for the
source station.
(DVB-T/C/S)
Channel Direct input of channel.
(DVB-T)
Satellite Here you can select the satellite where the stations
(DVB-S) are to be searched for.
Band Here you can select the frequency band in which
(DVB-S) shall be searched.
Setting ranges: horiz/low 10694 - 11906 MHz
horiz/high 11544 - 12756 MHz
vert/low
10694 - 11906 MHz
vert/high 11544 - 12756 MHz
Frequency DVB-T/C: Direct input of station frequency.
(DVB-T/C/S) DVB-S: Direct input of LNC frequency
Symbol rate Here you can specify the symbol rate
(DVB-S) Range: 1000-45000
78
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Stations
Station lists TV / Radio
Move block / Change order
Stations with LCN cannot be reordered. In this case,
the function Move block is hidden.
Under the menu item Station lists TV or Station lists Radio you
can edit (delete block, move block, restore deleted stations, delete
list) various lists, e.g., DVB-T, ASTRA LCN, DVB-C, etc. You can also
create and edit new Personal lists.
Select Move block,
move to list.
The function of Station lists Radio is similar to that of Station lists
TV. Therefore, editing of Station lists Radio will not be dealt with
separately.
Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
Change station list
If at least one station is locked, the access code must
be entered before changing stations.
Select insert position,
OK Confirm insert position.
HOME: Call Home view.
...
ASTRA LCN
Delete range Move range Restore stations
DVB-T
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
DVB-C
New
personal list
Select Station lists TV,
go to next column.
Mark desired station list,
call list.
Cancel process
ASTRA LCN
...
ASTRA LCN
DVB-T
DVB-C
New
personal list
Delete range
Back
ASTRA LCN
Mark System settings,
OK call system settings.
Delete list
1 Das Erste HD
10 Das Erste
19 Z
2 ZDF HD
11 ZDF
20 Z
3 RTL
12 arte
21 Z
4 SAT.1
13 RTL HD
22 S
5 ProSieben
14 SAT.1 HD
23 R
6 VOX
15 ProSieben HD
24 P
7 kabel eins
16 VOX HD
25 H
8 arte HD
17 kabel eins HD
26 S
9 Super RTL
18 Super RTL HD
27 N
Execute move
Back
Move range
Restore stations
Delete list
1 Das Erste HD
10 Das Erste
19 Z
2 ZDF HD
11 ZDF
20 Z
3 RTL
12 arte
21 Z
4 SAT.1
13 RTL HD
22 S
5 ProSieben
14 SAT.1 HD
23 R
6 VOX
15 ProSieben HD
24 P
7 kabel eins
16 VOX HD
25 H
8 arte HD
17 kabel eins HD
26 S
9 Super RTL
18 Super RTL HD
27 N
Select Execute move,
OK block will be moved, or
select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel move.
Restore stations
Select Restore stations,
move to list.
Here you can move stations around in all the lists, delete stations and restore stations you have previously deleted. You
can edit frequently-used stations in one or more personal lists.
Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
Here, you can delete and move station blocks as well
as restore deleted stations.
Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
The following section describes how to proceed if you
wish to Delete block, Move block,Restore stations
and Delete list.
Select Restore stations,
OK stations will be added again to the station list, or
Delete block
select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel restore.
Select Delete Block,
move to list.
Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
Delete list
Select Delete list,
OK confirm delete list.
OK Confirm delete.
Select Execute delete,
OK block will be deleted, or
select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel delete.
79
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Stations
Adding stations to Personal list
Compose / edit Personal list
Each personal list can contain up to 99 stations. You can compose the
personal lists to suit your convenience (e.g., topic lists). Other persons
using this TV set can create their own personal lists. You can create
up to six personal lists.
Creating and updating personal station lists is not possible as long
as a programmed timer recording is active.
The Personal list must be opened to add new
stations to it.
Select Add/remove Stations in the function list.
How to add stations is described in the left column.
Deleting stations from the Personal list
Create / edit New personal list
The Personal list must be opened to delete stations
in it.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Select Add/remove Stations in the function list,
OK
activate.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
go to personal list.
M
ark the station to be deleted in the personal list,
Mark Station lists TV,
go to next column.
OK activate. Function of the coloured keys in standard
PIP functionality.
Mark New personal list,
OK
New personal list x will be created.
BACK: Store and close station list.
x stands for the number of the personal list.
The number depends on how many list were
already created.
ASTRA1
19,2°E
...
13
n-tv
Personal list 1
1
SAT.1
14
ProSieben
Add station to personal list:
Mark in right-hand column and press
New
personal list
2
ZDF HD
15
3sat HD
Delete station from personal list:
Mark and press OK to remove.
3
BR Nord HD
16
ARTE HD
Select other station list / sorting in right-hand
column with "right menu control button"
4
3sat HD
17
EinsPlus
Use
5
ZDF Neo HD
18
Eurosport
19
ZDF Neo HD
20
ZDF.kultur
OK
to add.
to save new list.
M
ark the station in the station list which is to be
Move / reorder stations in the Personal list
The personal list must be opened to move stations
in it.
Select Move stations in the function list,
OK
activate.
Select station to be moved in the Personal list,
OK mark (station will be coloured red).
Select insert position (insert position will be
marked with a red line),
OK Execute move. Proceed in the same way with
additional stations.
BACK: Store and close station list.
added to the personal list.
OK adds the station to the personal list.
The new station will be added at the end of the
personal list. Proceed in the same way with additional stations.
Renaming the Personal list
The Personal list to be renamed must be opened.
Select Rename list in the function list,
OK
activate.
Call up additional options.
ASTRA LCN Examples of station lists. Select the station list from
DVB-T which you add stations to the personal list. In the
DVB-C personal list you can store stations from different
sources.
Sorting The sorting procedure for the source station list may
be changed between numerical and alphabetical.
BACK: Store and close station list.
Enter new name.
Select Adopt.
OK New name for the personal list will be adopted.
Delete Personal list
The Personal list to be deleted must be opened.
Deleting of the list is irrevocable.
Select Delete list in the function list,
OK
activate.
80
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Stations
Update station list automatically
Some programme providers offer an automatic update of the station lists (Dynamic Channel Management). You may Allow or Block
an automatic station list update. If automatic updating is allowed, a
screen message about an available update appears whenever the
list is changed.
Allow/block updates
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
At once The station list will be immediately updated. Normally
this occurs in the background without interfering
further with the TV‘s operation. In exceptional cases,
it is however possible that during this process an
automatic station change may be necessary.
After switch The channel list will be updated the next time the TV
off to set is switched off into standby mode.
standby
Later Updating the channel list will be postponed to a later
date. When the TV set is switched on and off, the
update message will appear again.
OK Confirm selection.
M
ark Update station list automatically,
go to next column.
...
Allow
If the channel list is not up to date, it will be automatically
updated provided the parameter "Allow" is selected.
Block
Transfer all station lists
You can export all station lists of your TV set to a USB storage device
or import station lists.
Calling Transfer all station lists
Select Allow or Block,
OK adopt.
If the channel list is not up to date, it will be
updated automatically, provided the option Allow
is selected.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
M
ark Transfer all station lists,
OK call.
Updating the station list
A message appears whenever the TV is switched on if the network
provider changes their channel list.
Transfer all sation lists
...
In Update station list automatically, Allow must
be selected.
Transfer all
station lists
Back
Here you can export or import all station lists of this TV set. To do this,
select the data storage device.
Before you remove the USB storage again, you need to safely disconnect
it with 'Unmount' from the TV set to prevent data loss.
Attention: When you import station lists, all station lists are overwritten in
this device!
Target
Export
USB1
Import Unmount
Update station list
Because your network provider has changed its station list, it has to be adapted
on your TV set as well. Please specify when you wish to do this.
At once
After switch off to standby
Later
Proceed with
Select a target if several USB storage media
are available.
Mark Export or Import,
OK confirm selection.
Select the desired procedure.
When you import station lists, all station lists are
overwritten in this device.
Before you remove the USB storage again, you need
to safely disconnect it with ‚Unmount‘ from the TV
set to prevent data loss.
81
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
Control
In the chapter Control you find settings for the various operating modes
like PIP and DR+ as well as settings referring in an interfunctional way
to your TV set like, for example, time and date and on-screen displays.
more ... After confirmation with the OK key you will be offered
additional not so frequently used sub items for the
current menu item.
On-screen Here you can make settings for the duration, position
displays and existence of special on-screen displays.
Calling Control
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Select Control,
go to next column.
Control
Language
Here you can define the menu language and for DVB
stations also the subtitle and audio language.
Parental
lock
EPG
Energy efficiency
Quick start
mode
See chapter System settings, section Control –
On-screen displays for further information.
Time and The time and date are normally obtained
date automatically from the TV.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Time and date for further information.
DVB settings Here you can make settings which only refer to DVB
stations (subtitles and audio mode, DVB character
set).
See chapter System settings, section Control –
DVB settings for further information.
Software
more ...
PIP In this menu you can make all adjustments for the
picture-in-picture display.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
PIP for further information.
Select desired menu item,
go to next column.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Control menu:
Language Here you can define the menu language and for DVB
stations also the subtitle and audio language.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Language for further information.
Parental With the parental lock you can bar access to all
lock stations immediately or daily for a certain period of
time. The stations can also be locked individually.
Age-dependent locking of programs with an appropriate age code is also possible.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Parental lock for further information.
DR+ Here you can do all the settings for the digital recorder.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
DR+ for further information.
Standard Here you can do all Standard Teletext settings.
Teletext See chapter System settings, section Control –
Standard Teletext for further information.
HbbTV Here you can do all settings for the HbbTV mode.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
HbbTV for further information.
Hard disks Here you find tools to format or check the hard disks.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Hard disks for further information.
EPG Here you can do all EPG settings.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
EPG for further information.
Energy Here you can determine how energy efficient your
efficiency TV set shall be.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Export log file.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Energy efficiency for further information.
key Here you can assign another function to the Web
function key. The selected function will then be called directly
when the key is pressed.
Quick start Here you can enable the Quick Start Mode. The TV
mode set will then immediately switch on from standby
without delay.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Web key function for further information.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Quick start mode for further information.
Software Here you can download new software from a USB
storage medium or from the Internet (as far as
requirements exist for this).
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Software for further information.
82
Export log file The log file available in the system is exported to a
USB storage device.
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
Language
EPG
Specify the language for all menus in the TV set in the language menu.
The language for the DVB subtitles and the film language can be set
for DVB programmes.
Calling EPG settings
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Call language
Mark Control,
go to next column.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark EPG,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
...
Mark Language,
go to next column.
Language
...
Language
Menu
Back
Subtitle (DVB)
(de)
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
(el)
Svenska
(sv)
English
(en)
Polski
(pl)
Dansk
(da)
(pt)
Français
(fr)
Magyar
(hu)
Português
Italiano
(it)
Suomi
(fi)
ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ
Español
(es)
Slovenščina (sl)
Norsk
(no)
Nederlands (nl)
Slovenčina (sk)
中文
(zh)
(cs)
Türkçe
Station selection TV
Please mark the stations with
program preview.
OK
for which you want a
Data capture
TV on when
memorised
Audio (DVB)
Deutsch
Čeština
EPG
Clear database
(ru)
(tr)
Explanation of the EPG setting options:
You can change the menu language here.
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Language menu:
Menu You can change the menu language here.
Subtitle If subtitles are provided by the DVB station, you can
(DVB) set your desired language in advance here. If this is
included in the range of languages of the station, it
will be shown automatically.
You can also specify an alternative language under
this menu item, in case your chosen language is not
offered by the station.
Audio (DVB) Specify your desired film language in advance here.
If this is included in the range of languages of the
station, it will be shown automatically.
You can also specify an alternative language under
this menu item, in case your chosen language is not
offered by the station.
Station In the Station selection you can determine for
selection TV which station in the programme guide, information
is to be displayed. Programme information is only
Station displayed for stations with in the EPG list. Using
selection the on-screen buttons in the bottom line you can
Radio mark all stations or unmark the stations or select
stations from specific (e.g., personal) lists.
Further information on EPG station selection you
find in chapter TV, section Electronic Programme
Guide – EPG wizard.
Due to the large number of receivable stations you
should restrict the station selection. This reduces the
data entry time and increases the clarity in the EPG.
Data Here you can switch the data entry for the electronic
capture programme guide (EPG) on and off.
If the data capture is switched on, your TV set tries to
update the database overnight (normally between 2
and 5 am) or, if required, two minutes after switching
to stand-by mode. The TV set must be on stand-by
for this and not switched off at the mains switch.
The indicator on the TV set lights blue during data
capture in stand-by mode.
The data are also updated while you are watching
the EPG station.
TV on when When yes is selected in the setting, the switched off
memorised TV switches on automatically in standby mode at
the beginning of a memorised programme. A screen
message appears when switching on. If this is not
confirmed within 5 minutes with the OK key, the TV
switches automatically off again for safety reasons.
Clear data This menu item allows you to remove all data from
base EPG database. It will take some time to retrieve this
data again.
83
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Parental lock menu:
Parental lock
You can select and set various security options to prevent
unauthorised use of the TV set and to protect your children from
unsuitable programmes.
Call Parental lock menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Lock single You can lock / unlock individual or all of the stations
stations in the station list specifically.
The lock remains active until it is switched off in the
menu.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Parental lock,
go to next column.
Parental lock
...
Parental lock
Age-related Some DVB stations also broadcast an age
lock classification. If the age set here is below the
broadcast age limit, the programme can only be
watched after entering the access code.
Back
Define 4 digit access code and memorise it, please.
(Note: The same digit must not be used four times).
Change You can change your access code at any time. Enter
access code the new access code in place of the old one.
|
1
Lock all The TV set is locked immediately the menu is exited.
stations All programmes can then only be watched after
entering the access code.
The lock can be activated both Immediately and
for a Daily defined period.
The lock remains active until it is switched off in the
menu.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Deactivate All set parental locks (locked stations, agedependent locks, locked films in the DR+ archive)
are cancelled. The current secret code is deleted.
When the parental lock is reactivated all the previous
parental locks are set again automatically.
Cancel
With the parental lock you can bar access to all stations immediately or daily for a certain period of time. The stations
can also be locked individually. Age dependent locking of prorams with an appropriate age code is also possible.
Define a four digit access code (PIN) the first time you
open it. Note the access code (PIN) well.
The access code must not consist of the same four
digits.
Mark Confirm,
OK activate.
The new PIN must be entered and confirmed again.
The Parental lock menu will be opened.
Parental lock
...
Parental
lock
Lock all stations
Back
Lock single stations
Age-related lock
Immediately
no
yes
Daily
no
yes, from 00:00 until 00:00
Change acces code
Deactivate
Reset All currently set parental locks are finally cancelled.
The access code is deleted.
Protection of minors for CI Plus programmes
Youth-protected broadcasts of programme providers with CI Plus
encoding possibly require you to enter the secret number (PIN) of
the CA module.
The Parental lock PIN of the CA module can be store in the TV set.
We recommend selecting the secret number of the TV set according
to the secret number of the CA module, since the secret number of
the CA module cannot be changed. This means that you must only
remember one secret number.
Code number
The code number cancels all entered access codes. It can be used for
example if you have forgotten your PIN. In the supplied user guide you
find a note on the access code number. Remove this one from the user
guide and keep it in a safe place.
You can bar access to all stations. This can be done immediately or daily for a certain period of time.
The four-digit access code (PIN) must be entered
when the parental lock is opened in future. For security
reasons, it appears encrypted (****) when entering.
Note for unlocking
As soon as the PIN has once been entered to unlock your TV set, all
currently set parental locks will be disabled temporarily. Besides of the
general locks described in this chapter, this is also valid for parental
lock of DR+ archive entries. Parental locks will only be re-enabled when
the TV set is switched off.
84
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
Energy efficiency
Quick start mode
Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall be. The value for
the contrast (and thus the brightness of the background lighting)
is adapted and the automatic dimmer activated or deactivated
depending on the presetting.
If you enable the Quick Start Mode and you switch on the TV set from
standby, the TV picture can be immediately seen without delay. You
can specify the times at which your device will be in the Quick Start
Mode.
Please note that in this case you will have a higher energy consumption.
Call Energy efficiency
Default setting for the Quick Start Mode: no
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Call Quick start mode
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Energy efficiency,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
...
Energy efficiency
Home Mode
Premium
Mode
The priority here is low energy consumption in home use. In this
case, the TV switches off automatically for the sake of saving
energy, after it has been out of operation for four hours.
Shop Mode
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of the setting options in the energy efficiency
menu:
Mark Quick start mode,
go to next column.
Quick start mode
...
Quick start
mode
Back
Here you can specify the times at which your device should be in quick
start mode.
Period1
no
Period2
no
yes, from 06:00 until 09:00
yes, from 11:00 until 15:00
Period3
no
yes, from 18:00 until 21:00
Here you can specify the times at which your device should be in quick start mode.
Select desired setting and make changes.
You can individually change the suggested
times.
OKAdopt settings.
Home Mode The emphasis for home use is on low energy
consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.
Choosing Home Mode automatically activates
shutdown.
Premium This mode optimises the settings to a brighter
Mode environment at a higher energy consumption. The
automatic dimmer is activated.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
Shop Mode The picture settings are aligned to operation in
the presentation room. The automatic dimmer is
deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes,
the energy consumption is not reduced.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
85
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
Software update
USB stick - requirements
It is possible to update the software on your Loewe TV set.
USB sticks tested by Loewe and compatible in type and format can
be ordered from the Loewe dealer using the article no. 90456.900.
In the software update (package update) all the software releases in
the TV are scanned and updated as required.
Here you can download a new piece of software from different sources
(if existing).
If you would like to use your own USB stick, please follow these tips/
conditions:
• Formatting in FAT32.
Current software versions can be downloaded from the Loewe Internet
site (see below) and installed on your TV set using a USB stick.
• Just one partition.
If your TV set is connected to the Internet, the TV set can be updated
directly via the Internet (see chapter System settings, section
Control – Manual update via the Internet).
• Do not use USB sticks that simulate a CD ROM drive.
Updating the software is not possible as long as a programmed
timer recording is active.
When a software update occurs it may happen that timer entries and
memorised programmes are deleted. After such a software update,
check your timer list (see chapter TV, section Timer – Timer list).
Please be aware of the requirements of your USB stick in section
Technical data – Media.
Software download from the Loewe Internet site for update
via USB
Where available, you can download new software for your TV set from
our homepage.
Visit our homepage under:
www.loewe.tv/int/supportportal
www.loewe.tv/uk/supportportal
www.loewe.tv/au/supportportal
(International),
(United Kingdom and Republic
of Ireland),
(Australia).
Choose the item Register free-of-charge on the Service Choose
Register for free on the support homepage. Simply follow the steps
in the registration process.
After the successful registration process and subsequent login to the
support homepage you have to register your TV set (have the article
number and serial number ready – both of these are on a label stuck
to the back of the set or can be looked up under System settings ‫ט‬
Extras ‫ ט‬Integrated features.
Then you will get a list of downloadable contents for your TV set
including the software. Download the data and unpack all the files in
this ZIP archive into the main directory of your USB stick.
Then carry out the software update as described below.
86
• Do not use encrypted USB sticks.
• There may be no hidden files on the device.
• For some types of device, the construction of the USB stick is significant.
Maximum dimensions in mm: 70x20x10.
• If in doubt, the USB stick should be formatted as “FAT32” without
“extended attributes”.
In order to avoid problems during the software update of the tv set
the USB stick in use should meet the requirements.
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
Software update via USB storage device
To do this, plug the USB stick with the downloaded software into a
free USB port of the TV set.
New software package found
New software
...
Via USB
A new software version was found.
New software: V1.1.14.0 (Current software: V.1.1.11.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the
close with the
button.
Calling Software update
button. Otherwise
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
HOME: Call Home view.
Proceed with
End with
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Software,
go to next column.
Mark Software update,
go to next column.
Mark Via USB,
call Software update.
The version of the software package that is
currently installed will be displayed.
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Or:
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
Load new software package
Updating software
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
...
Via USB
...
Via USB
The "V1.1.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
60%
Current software: 1.1.11.0
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on a
USB storage device that is connected (e.g. USB stick). Press the
key to start
the search.
Proceed with
Cancel with
Proceed.
The TV set searches for a new software package
on the USB stick.
If a new software version is available after the search,
an on-screen message appears (see right hand
column).
If several different software packages are found on the
USB stick, the latest software package is always used.
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK:End of wizard.
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during the loading and
programming process.
Note: Depending on the loaded software, it is possible that the device cannot
automatically switch off after the update. Therefore, please monitor the
update process.
The software is loaded in several steps. The total loading
and programming process can take up to approx. 50
minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
After the update, the TV set is automatically powered
off and on again.
Depending on the software loaded, it is possible that
the device may not turn off automatically after the
update. Therefore, please supervise the update
process.
When the TV set is switched on again, a message is
displayed.
Hint
The software was successfully updated.
Finish wizard with
BACK:End of wizard.
87
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
New software package found
Manual update via the Internet
If an Internet connection is available, new software can be downloaded
directly and installed onto the TV set.
New software
...
Start update
A new software version was found.
New software: V1.1.14.0 (Current software: V1.1.11.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the
close with the
button.
Calling Software update
button. Otherwise
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
HOME: Call Home view.
Proceed with
End with
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Software,
go to next column.
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Mark Software update,
go to next column.
Or:
Mark Via Internet,
go to next column.
You will see a message on the screen regarding
data protection.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Data protection
...
Start update
In accordance with § 33 of the Federal Data Protection Act (BDSG) we point out
that machine numbers and the installation site of your TV set , as well as the
current updates and the current software status in each case, are processed and
saved by a computer system if you use the
button to confirm. This data
ensures that we are always able to provide you with optimal service. All data is
handled confidentially.
If you do not wish this to be the case, please press the
Proceed with
button.
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
Load new software package
Only the parts of the software package that are not up
to date will be automatically downloaded from the
Internet and updated.
Each part of the software is downloaded individually
from the Internet and is then programmed.
End with
The total time required for all the software parts to be
downloaded from the Internet is dependent on the
speed of data transfer that is being used.
If you are not in agreement with the relevant data being
passed on:
BACK: Exit the update process.
The update will then not be carried out.
The total programming process can take up to 50
minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
Updating software
...
Start update
The "V1.1.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
60%
Otherwise: Confirm data protection message by pressing .
The version of the software package that is currently
installed will be displayed.
-NSD3GDKN@CHMF@MCOQNFQ@LLHMFOQNBDRRB@MS@JDTOSN@OOQNW LHMTSDR
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Note: Depending on the loaded software, it is possible that the device cannot
automatically switch off after the update. Therefore, please monitor
the update process.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
...
Start update
Current software: 1.1.11.0
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on the
update server. Press the
key to start the search.
Back with
Proceed with
After the update, the TV set is automatically powered
off and on again.
Depending on the software loaded, it is possible that
the device may not turn off automatically after the
update. Therefore, please supervise the update
process.
Proceed.
The TV set connects to the Internet and scans the
update server for new software.
If a new software version is available after the search, an
on-screen message appears (see right hand column).
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK: End of wizard.
88
When the TV set is switched on again, a message is
displayed.
BACK:End of wizard.
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
Load new software package
Software update via Antenna
A software update via antenna is only available for stations of the
Freeview DVB-T platform in the UK and Ireland.
Updating software
...
Via antenna
The "V1.1.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
60%
-NSD3GDKN@CHMF@MCOQNFQ@LLHMFOQNBDRRB@MS@JDTOSN@OOQNW LHMTSDR
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Calling Software update
Note: Depending on the loaded software, it is possible that the device cannot
automatically switch off after the update. Therefore, please monitor
the update process.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Software,
go to next column.
The software is downloaded in several steps. The total
downloading and programming process can take up to
approx. 50 minutes in total.
Mark Software update,
go to next column.
Mark Via Antenna,
call Software update.
You will see a message on the screen regarding
data protection.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
After the update, the TV set is automatically powered
off and on again.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
...
Via antenna
Current software: 1.1.11.0
For loading a new software, it is mandatory to have the antenna cable attached
to the TV. Start search pressing the key
.
Proceed with
Cancel with
Depending on the software loaded, it is possible that
the device may not turn off automatically after the
update. Therefore, please supervise the update
process.
When the TV set is switched on again, a message is
displayed.
Proceed.
The TV set searches for a new software package.
Hint
The software was successfully updated.
Finish wizard with
If a new software version is available after the search, an
on-screen message appears (see below).
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK: End of wizard.
BACK:End of wizard.
New software package found
New software
...
Via antenna
A new software version was found.
New software: V1.1.14.0 (Current software: V1.1.11.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the
close with the
button.
button. Otherwise
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
Proceed with
End with
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Or:
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
89
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
Automatic update via the internet
At the end of the initial installation, Information on new software
updates was selected.
This item cannot be called up via the menu, but appears
automatically when a new version is found in the search for software.
New software package found
If the TV set has found a new software version during the check, you
will be informed about this via a screen message.
Select the desired procedure.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - New software
A new software version is now available and can be downloaded from the internet.
New software: V1.1.12.0
(Current software: V1.1.11.0)
Please specify how you would like to continue:
Load new software now
Load software when switching off to standby
Load software later (max. 3 times notification)
Do not load this software version
Adopt with
OK
Load the After confirmation, the new TV software will be
software loaded from the internet and then programmed.
now
Load the
software
when
switch off to
standby
The software will be loaded and programmed after
the TV set has been switched off into standby mode
for the next time. The display on the control panel
will light up blue during the update.
The TV set must not be switched off at the mains
before the downloading process is complete (control
panel display lights up white)!
Load the
software
later (at
most
three-fold
notification)
Loading the software will be postponed to a later date.
The new software message will be displayed the next
time the TV set is switched on.
If the loading process is postponed three times then
the message will only be shown again once the next
software version is available.
Do not The new software will not be loaded. The on-screen
load this message will only be shown again for the next softsoftware ware version.
version
Confirm selection.
90
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
On-screen displays
Time and date
You can select different settings in this menu which affect the onscreen displays.
The time and date are normally acquired automatically by the TV
set. If the data is missing or wrong, you can adjust it via the time and
date menu.
Call On-screen displays
Call Time and date
HOME: Call Home view.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark On-screen displays,
go to next column.
On-screen displays
...
On-screen
displays
Mark Time and date,
go to next column.
Back
Display time
<
Volume display
off
7sec
Time and date
>
...
on
Time and
date
Data capture
back
Automatic
Automatic menu info
off
on
Time zone
<
Key explanation
off
on
Changeover summer time/winter time
no yes
Permanent clock display
off
on
Beginning of daylight-saving time
29.03.
Automatic HDMI hint
off
on
End of daylight-saving time
25.10.
Right info display
off
on
Note: The following data is automatically obtained.
Switch off curtain
<
7sec
>
If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear
simultaneously.
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the On-screen
displays menu:
Display time Here you set the duration of the display, e.g. for
the volume or the station display when changing
stations.
The duration can be set between 2 and 9 seconds.
Volume Here you set whether a volume change is also to be
display indicated visibly on the screen.
Automatic Herewith you activate/deactivate the info text
menu info displays for the currently selected menu item.
Key If yes is set, the assignment of special remote control
explanation keys is indicated together with the TV status display.
Permanent The time display can be permanently shown. It is
clock display always visible as long as no other display is made.
Automatic If yes is set here, a message about the adapted funcHDMI hint tion of the remote control is shown whenever you
switch over to an HDMI channel position to which a
Digital Link HD capable TV set is connected.
Right info This activates/deactivates the right-hand additional
display on-screen display in the status bar when switching
between channels.
Switch off Here you can specify whether there is a switch-off
curtain curtain (0 = no curtain) and how long this one needs
for closing.
Off
+01:00 hour(s)
Time
14:26:12
Date
10.02.2015
>
If you need to manually set the time and date entries, turn off automatic mode.
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Time and date menu:
Data capture If you need to set the time and date entries manually,
turn off the automatic setting here.
Time zone The current time at the Greenwich Meridian 0 is to be
understood as world time. The time shift in relation to
this time must be given in hours (–11 to +13).
Changeover If the summer time in your country is changed to
summer time Daylight-saving time, select yes please.
/ winter time
Beginning of Enter the date on which the time is switched over to
daylight- summer time if it deviates from the automatically
saving time calculated date. This menu item appears only if yes
was selected for Daylight-saving time.
Only possible when changeover summer time/
winter time – yes has been selected.
End Enter the date on which the summer time ends if
of daylight- it deviates from the automatically calculated date.
saving time This menu item appears only if yes was selected for
Daylight-saving time.
Only possible when changeover summer time/
winter time – yes has been selected.
Time Enter the time (00:00 to 23:59) / date (day.month.
Date year) with the numerical keys of the remote control.
Only possible when Data capture - off or when
time has not been automatically acquired.
91
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
DVB settings
PIP
You can make general pre-settings for DVB stations.
Adjust size of the PIP image
HOME: Call Home view.
Calling DVB settings
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark PIP,
go to next column.
Mark DVB settings,
go to next column.
PIP
...
DVB settings
...
DVB settings
Subtitle mode
PIP
Size
Back
Small
Large
Back
Off
normal
For hearing-impaired persons
DVB character set
Western European
Audio commentary
off
Standard
Polish
Greek
Turkish
on
Here you may select the size of your Picture-in-Picture fade-in.
Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to be displayed as soon as it is offered by the station. A special subtitle
for impaired hearing can also be selected.
Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanation of the DVB setting options:
Subtitle Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to
mode be displayed as soon as it is offered by the station.
A special subtitle for impaired hearing can also be
selected.
Subtitles are not offered by all stations. Many stations
only broadcast subtitles by teletext.
DVB Select the DVB character set so that the title of the
character broadcast of your favourite received station or the
set texts of your CA module are displayed correctly.
Audio You can preset the system here to always play
commentary a special soundtrack for the visually impaired
whenever one is available. This soundtrack uses an
audio commentary to describe the action taking
place on-screen.
92
Explanations of setting possibilities in the PIP Settings menu:
Size You can choose if your second picture faded in
(picture in picture) shall be displayed small or large.
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
DR+
You can adapt the digital recorder to suit your needs when you record
programmes on an externally attached USB hard disk.
Call settings for the digital recorder
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark DR+,
go to next column.
...
DR+
Recording
Serial The serial recording tolerance is necessary to
recording avoid recording a serial more than once when it is
tolerance broadcast more than once a day.
It is only recorded when it begins within the
given time interval (start time +- series recording
tolerance).
Use the numeric button on the remote control to
enter the time (always two-digit for 01 to 60 min.).
Factory setting: ± 30 min.
Recording Select here whether subtitles are to be recorded for
subtitles DVB stations.
Factory setting: no (1.
DR+ Here, all settings are made in order to use the DR+
Streaming archives of other LOEWE TV sets in the home
network.
See next page for further information.
You may set the pre-record and post-record times here.
Notify hidden sections
Jump distance
Smart Jump
Recording
subtitles
DR+
Streaming
Mark desired setting,
go to next column.
Make settings,
OK confirm setting.
Explanation of the DR+ setting options
Recording You can set a pre-record and post-record time for
timer recordings made without auto time control.
This minimizes the risk that a part of the broadcast
is not recorded due to the broadcast starting earlier
and/or finishing later.
Factory setting: pre-record time: 1 min,
post-record time: 5 min.
Notify If an entry has been hidden in an archive recording,
hidden you can get informed by a screen message when
sections skipping a hidden area.
Factory setting: yes.
Jump Set the standard jump distance (in minutes) used
distance for jumping forwards or backwards in the movie by
briefly pressing the or keys.
Factory setting: 2 min.
Smart jump If the „Smart jump“ mode is activated you can
approach a desired place by pressing the and buttons alternately and halving the jump width. After
every 3rd jump in the same direction the jump width
is doubled (up to a maximum of 8 minutes).
If off is set you always jump the same currently set
jump width (time) with the and buttons.
Factory setting: on
(1
for devices in DK, FIN, N or S: yes.
93
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
Call DR+ streaming settings
Standard Teletext
The DR+ settings are called (see previous page).
Mark DR+ Streaming,
go to next column.
In the Standard Teletext menu you can configure the Teletext.
Call Teletext settings
HOME: Call Home view.
...
DR+
Streaming
Use Archive
other TVs
Notify start-
By selecting "yes" here, you can view films from the DR+
archives of other Loewe TVs that have been set up for this
function, as long as these units have had their DR+ archives
made accessible. Again, this takes place using your home
network.
DR+ device
name
DR+ device
group name
IP port
number
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark Standard Teletext,
go to next column.
Mark desired setting,
go to next column.
...
Standard
Teletext
Character
set
The programme preview pages and the page for the programme subtitles are
specified here.
Make settings,
OK confirm setting.
Explanation of the setting options for DR+ streaming
Also use Setting yes enables you, via the archive, to also view
other recordings from other TV sets that have accessible
archives. movies within the home network (client function).
Notify
started
„Follow me“
recording
Please indicate here whether your TV should provide
automatic notification when a programme is available
for viewing as soon as this has been started as a
„Follow me“ recording on another TV in the network.
DR+ Give your TV set a unique name for quick identification
device name in the network.
DR+ device Give a name for your TV set group.
group name Using different group names enables you to group
your TV sets as required. Only TV sets under the
same group name can exchange data.
IP port IP port numbers are preset ex-factory. Under normal
number circumstances they do not require amending.
94
Explanations of the Standard Teletext menu functions:
Character set Teletext character set can be switched to other languages (Russian, Greek, Polish and Turkish).
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
HbbTV
Hard disks
Here you can do all settings for the HbbTV mode.
Formatting the external hard disk
Call HbbTV settings
If problems occur when operating the external hard disk, these may
be fixed by formatting the hard disk.
Additionally, you can re-format the hard disk in order to quickly and
easily delete all the data stored on it.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Warning!
Formatting the hard disk will erase all data stored on it!
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark HbbTV,
go to next column.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
...
HbbTV
HbbTV
mode
When the HbbTV mode (Hybrid broadcast broadband TV
mode) ist actvie, additional services and further information
(e.g. from the Internet) can be viewed if these offered by
the current station.
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark Hard disks,
go to next column.
Mark Format external one,
confirm.
A warning note will be displayed.
...
Mark desired setting,
go to next column.
Hard disks
Format
external one
If problems occur when operating the external
hard disk, these may be fixed by formatting
the hard disk. However, please be aware that this
will delete all data on the storage medium.
CAUTION
Do you really want to
format the external hard
drive?
Formatting deletes all
the data on the hard
drive.
To start formatting, hold
down the OK button for
at least three seconds.
Make settings,
OK confirm setting.
Explanation of the setting options for HbbTV
HbbTV- When the HbbTV mode is active (factory setting),
Modus additional services and further information (e.g., also
from the Internet) can be viewed if these are offered
by the current station.
Start
behaviour of
HbbTVstations
If HbbTV mode – on has been selected, you can
specify if an available HbbTV application should be
loaded automatically after the channel has been
changed or if this should only occur manually after
the red key has been pressed once.
The startup behaviour can be set for TV and radio
stations.
After loading the HbbTV application, an on screen
message is displayed (depending on the channel
that is being viewed).
Function of With the setting Standard Teletext first (factory
the TEXT setting), the standard Teletext is opened when the
key TEXT key is pressed for the first time. Pressing the
TEXT key for a second time will then display the
MediaText. Pressing the TEXT key for a third time
will bring you back to the TV picture. If MediaText
first is selected, the TEXT key will do the exact
opposite.
Depending on the programme provider, the direct
Call of MediaText may not be possible. MediaText
must then be opened by means of the HbbTV
application.
OK
Press at least for three seconds to start formatting.
Or:
BACK: Cancel procedure
Never ever switch off the TV set during a formatting
process.
After the formatting, a message will appear on the
screen showing the results of the formatting and tips
on how to resolve any problems that exist, should there
be any.
After the formatting the TV set must be switched
off and on again.
Note on formatting external USB disks:
The TV set supports the two hard disk file systems FAT 32 and NTFS.
External hard disks are formatted by the TV in the FAT32 file system
to full capacity.
With FAT32, the maximum size of a file is 4 GB.
For a parallel use of TV and PC, we recommend that you reformat
the hard disk on a PC to NTFS.
95
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Control
Export log file
When selecting Via USB:
To resolve problems, a log file can be provided for the service. The log
file can be exported to a USB storage device or manually or automatically transferred via the Internet.
Select a target if several USB storage media
are available.
The log file can be transferred via the Internet only when an online
connection exists. The transferred data is anonymous and purely of
technical nature without reference to person, location or IP address.
Browser history or login details are not stored or transferred.
Mark Export,
OK confirm selection.
Before you remove the USB storage again, you need
to safely disconnect it with Unmount from the TV
set to prevent data loss.
Call export of the log file
When selecting Settings:
HOME: Call Home view.
Export log file
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
...
Export log
file
Via Internet
Back
Via USB
Settings
Hereby you enable/disable the automatic export of the problem file as
soon as a problem situation has occurred. The file is transferred to the
Loewe server and stored there.
Mark Control,
go to next column.
Autom. export
on
off
Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark the desired setting.
Mark Export log file,
go to next column.
Export log file
...
Export log
file
Back
Dear Sir or Madam,
For securing our quality standards and for statistical analysis your device
transmits technical data to our server.
This data is anonymous and of a technical nature without reference to
person, location or IP address.
All data will be deleted from our servers not later than 4 weeks.
More information can be found in our privacy policy.
(https://www.loewe.tv/uk/service/datenschutz.html)
I agree
OK
WEB key function
Select I agree, if you accept the privacy
policies,
OK Confirm selection.
Export log file
Export log
file
Via Internet
Back
Via USB
Settings
Here you can export the log file existing in the system. This one can be
provided to the service for troubleshooting.
Before you remove the USB storage again, you need to safely
disconnect it with “Unmount” from the TV set to prevent data loss.
Target
Export
When set to on, the file is automatically transferred
to the Loewe server and stored as soon as a problem
situation has occurred.
I don't agree
Confirm with
...
Autom. Herewith you enable/disable the automatic export
Export of the problem file as soon as a problem situation
has occurred.
You can assign the Web key on the remote control unit a particular
function (MediaNet, picture/sound menu, sound mode, etc.).
The selected function will then be called directly when the key is
pressed.
Call WEB key settings
Default setting: MediaNet
HOME: Call Home view.
Select System settings,
OK call System settings.
USB1
Unmount
Select Control,
go to next column.
Select more ...,
call other settings.
Select Via Internet, Via USB or Settings.
When selecting Via Internet:
Mark Export log files now,
OK confirm selection.
This transfers all stored log files to the Loewe
server.
After successful transmission, a reference
number will be displayed that you can specify as
a reference when making inquiries.
key function,
Select
go to next column.
...
You can assign the WEB button another function here.
The selected function is then accessed directly when the
button is pressed.
WEB
key
function
Sound/picture music
Sound
mode
Picture format
Headphone
volume
3D
Internet radio
Photo
Video
Select function,
OK Adopt.
96
Adopt with
OK
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Network settings
Network
Under Network settings you make settings to your network adaptors
and the various types of media.
The network wizard guides you through all the necessary settings
relevant to your network
At the beginning you see the current network status.
Call network settings
HOME: Call Home view.
Network
status
NETWORK WIZARD - Network status
...
Networking
Current settings:
Networking
IP configuration
.
Wired
Automatic
Additional information:
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
DNS server 1
DNS server 2
MAC address
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
Proceed with
172.16.10.141
255.255.0.0
172.16.0.1
172.16.0.1
192.168.1.1
18:16:0f:71:af:92
End with
Mark Network settings,
go to next column.
...
Network
settings
Networking
The following antenna wizard guides you through all the
necessary settings relevant to your network.
Host name
Proceed to next step.
Security hint
Internet Security hint
...
Networking
Proxy server
Wake on
LAN/WiFi
Select desired menu item,
go to next column.
Back with
Proceed with
Proceed to next step.
Explanations of the setting options in the network menu:
Networking Here, the network wizard starts that guides you
through all necessary settings to your network (see
right hand column).
This next step allows you to connect your TV device to the Internet. This enables
.
you to use of a number
of different services and get the most out of your
device’s technical capabilities.
For data protection reasons, we would like to point out that once the device is
connected to the Internet data will be transferred between your TV device and
the Internet as this is a prerequisite for use. As a result, your TV device is subject
to the same risks and dangers as any other device with Internet capabilities, e.g.
computer, smartphone, etc.
In this respect, Loewe guarantees that this data will not be personally exploited
in any way. However, a statistical analysis of anonymised data records may be
carried out. If you have any questions, please contact your dedicated Loewe
advisor or call the Loewe Hotline.
Network
mode
Select network mode
...
Networking
Please select the desired network mode from the list or switch it off completely.
.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
button.
off
Reset to Here, all network settings are reset to factory defactory faults.
settings
On, wired only
On, wireless only
Back with
Host name Give your TV set a name so that it can be uniquely
identified in the network.
Proxy server Do the settings for using a proxy server. The proxy
server wizard will be called.
See chapter System settings, section Multimedia
/ Network – Proxy server for further information.
Wake on Here you can specify whether it is permitted to
LAN/WiFi access your TV set by LAN/WLAN in standby mode.
This allows you to switch on your TV, for example.
Please note that the TV set consequently uses more
power in standby mode.
After switching off the TV set into standby mode,
it takes minimum 30 seconds for the TV set to
be ready for reception of a signal (Wake on LAN/
WLAN) to power on via LAN/WLAN.
If you want to switch on your TV set via the Loewe
Smart TV2move App by Wake on WLAN, you
have to configure in your router‘s encryption
permanently on WPA2. Setting WPA / WPA2 may
not be used.
Select network mode.
Select how you want to connect your TV set to
your network.
OK Confirm selection.
Off Deactivates all existing network adaptors of your
TV set.
On, wired Access to the network only via a network cable.
only The wireless access is deactivated.
On, wireless Access to the network only via WLAN.
only The access via a network cable is deactivated.
Depending on which type of network (wireless or wired)
was selected, the appropriate settings appear below.
97
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Configuration of the built-in LAN adaptor
Configuration of the built-in WLAN bridge adaptor
As network operation was selected On, wired only.
As network operation was selected On, wireless only.
The TV set now searches for wireless routers.
IP
configuration
IP configuration
...
Networking
You can define the necessary parameters for the IP configuration yourself
("manual") or set this. to be done automatically. The automatic setting occurs
through a DHCP server or by means of several protocols in accordance with the
"Universal Plug and Play" specification (UPnP)."
Automatic
Access point
selection
Access point selection
...
Networking
Manual
Please choose the access point to which the TV should connect.
Note: The newly selected
parameter must be confirmed with the
.
OK
button.
FritzBox 7490
Netgear
Router ABC
Back with
Proceed with
Search again
Enter access point manually
Back with
Select type of IP configuration.
After the end of the search:
Select a base station to which the TV shall be
connected.
OK Confirm selection and proceed to the entry of the
Wi-Fi password.
automatic Automatic configuration of the IP address via DHCP
server or via multiple protocols according to UPnP
specification (including DHCP).
After selecting IP configuration – automatic
proceed to the network status.
If the desired access point is not found:
Mark Search again,
OK repeat search for wireless routers.
manual Enter your fixed IP addresses manually.
Or:
Mark Enter access point manually,
OK enter manually the SSID of the desired access
point, e.g., when the SSID of the access point is
not transferred.
If manual has been selected under IP configuration:
Manual IPconfiguration
Manual IP configuration
...
Netzworking
Please specify the static IP address of the network adapter.
.
IP address
192.168.000.123
Subnet mask
255.255.255.000
Gateway
192.168.000.100
DNS server 1
192.168.000.010
DNS server 2
Back with
192.168.001.010
Proceed with
WPA
passphrase
WPA passphrase
...
Networking
The selected base station uses WPA encryption, for which a password consisting
of between 8 and 64. characters is required. Please insert it in the dialogue
below.
Proceed with
Back with
Proceed with
Enter IP, Subnet mask, Gateway and DNS server
addresses in succession with the numerical keys
on the remote control.
Proceed to network status.
Network
status
NETWORK WIZARD - Network status
...
Networking
Current settings:
Networking
IP configuration
.
Wired
Automatic
Additional information:
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
DNS server 1
DNS server 2
MAC address
Proceed with
172.16.10.141
255.255.0.0
172.16.0.1
172.16.0.1
192.168.1.1
18:16:0f:71:af:92
End with
The TV set automatically detects the type of encryption
used and informs you. You will find the supported
encryption types in chapter Technical data.
If your wireless network is not encrypted: Proceed to
IP configuration.
Proceed to password entry.
Enter WLAN password.
In case of an unknown WLAN key, contact your
network administrator.
For WEP encryption
You see the current network status again.
BACK: End of wizard.
98
Select the WEP index,
OK proceed to IP configuration.
Select type of IP configuration.
For the further workflow of the network wizard
see left column under IP configuration.
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Explanation of the settings in the network status:
Network shows the current type of connection (wireless or
wired).
IP The current assignment method for the IP address
configuration of your TV set (automatic or manual).
Proxy server
In the proxy server wizard you make arrangements for your TV set for
a connection with a home network with proxy server.
A proxy server is not necessary for most home networks.
Contact your home network administrator if you are unclear about
the proxy server settings.
IP address Your current IP address.
Subnet mask Your current subnet-mask IP address.
Use proxy
server
Proxy server - Use proxy server
...
Proxy server
Here you can choose whether to use a proxy server for network access or not.
Most home-networks. work without a proxy server.
Don‘t use
Use
Proceed with
End with
Gateway The IP address of your gateway.
Specify if a Proxy server is used in your home network.
DNS server 1 Your current first DNS server IP address.
Mark Use or Don’t use,
The following settings will only be requested after
the selection of Use.
DNS server 2 Your current second DNS server IP address.
Proceed to next step.
Network (for wireless connection only)
SSID The name of your network.
Proxy server
name
Proxy server name
...
Proxy server
.
MAC address (for wired connection only)
(TV) Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hardware of your TV set’s wired network adaptor (LAN).
Back with
Proceed with
Proceed to entry of the proxy server name.
MAC address (for wireless connection only)
(WLAN) Indicates the MAC address that is built into the
hardware of your TV set’s wireless network adaptor
(WLAN).
Connection Gives you information about the current status of
status your wireless connection (save settings, connecting,
login failed, access point not found, not connected,
connection established).
In the following dialogue, please enter the proxy server's name or IP address.
Specify the name or IP address of the proxy server
used.
Proceed to next step.
Proxy port
number
Proxy port number
...
Proxy server
Please specify the proxy server's port number in the following dialogue.
.
Back with
Proceed with
Link Specifies the signal strength as a percentage.
quality
Proceed to entry of the proxy port number.
Specify the network port number of the proxy server.
Proceed to next step.
Proxy server
login
Proxy server login
...
Proxy server
Here you can specify whether the indicated proxy server requires you to log in
with a username and. password.
No login
Back with
Login necessary
Proceed with
Specify whether your proxy server requires a special
login.
Mark No login or Login necessary,
Proceed to next step.
Enter your login data for the proxy server.
User name and password are requested only after
selecting Proxy server login.
99
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Multimedia settings
Renderer
Under this menu item you find further settings for Audio, Video and
Photo.
Here you can allow external devices to access your TV set (renderer)
via app to render (play back) contents there.
Calling the Multimedia settings menu
Call up renderer menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
Mark Multimedia settings,
go to next column.
...
Multimedia
settings
Default setting: on
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
Mark Renderer,
go to next column.
When navigating through the files if you pause in this view
you can input whether and when the view should
automatically return to the player.
...
Renderer
on
You can allow external devices here and access your TV
(renderer) via an app to play content there.
off
Select desired settings.
Select the setting on or off.
Explanations of the setting options in the Multimedia settings
menu:
Auto return The music player will reappear whenever another
to music dialogue, e.g., music selection is called during
player playback, and no keys are pressed for the set time
period.
You can specify if and after which time the music
player reappears (selection options are No, After
1 min, After 5 min).
100
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Connections
Connections
Settings for the connection of external appliances are made in this
menu.
The menu item Connections is not available while a timer recording is active.
Calling the connections menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Connections
Sound components
A wizard guides you step by step through the
configuration of your sound reproduction components.
Antenna
DVB
AV connecting settings
Digital Link
Gaming
mode
Select desired settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Connections menu:
Sound The sound components wizard helps you to configure
components the components that are used to reproduce the TV
sound.
See chapter System settings, section Connections
– Sound components for further information.
Antenna DVB Here you can set the parameters of the DVB-T and
the DVB-S antenna with the antenna wizard.
See chapter System settings, section Connections
– Antenna DVB for further information.
AV In the AV connecting settings the parameters for the
connecting AV connection socket can be adapted.
settings See chapter System settings, section Connections
– AV connecting settings for further information.
Digital Link All settings for Digital Link are made here.
See chapter System settings, section Connections
– Digital Link for further information.
Gaming Here you can set a faster display of your activities on
mode the screen for various inputs of the TV set, e.g., for
games consoles.
See chapter System settings, section Connections
– Gaming mode for further information.
101
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Connections
Sound components
The sound components wizard helps you to configure the components
that are used to reproduce the TV sound. For sound reproduction, you
can configure the TV loudspeakers, loudspeaker systems as well as
analogue and digital HiFi/AV amplifiers.
Calling the sound components wizard
For information on navigation within the wizard, see chapter General
information on menu operation.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Select Connections,
go to next column.
Select Sound components,
go to next column.
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD - Sound playback via ...
...
Sound components
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your
TV sound. If you do not want to listen exclusively via the built-in speakers,
all additional speakers or devices must be connected with the audio
output sockets AUDIO DIGITAL OUT.
If you have a TV set without built-in speakers, the items relating to the TV
speakers may not be selected.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK
button.
TV speakers
Speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
HiFi/AV amplifier
Sound playback via ...
Some sound components can only be selected when the respective
device is connected to the TV set.
TV Sound reproduction via the built-in TV speakers
speakers (factory setting).
With the selection of TV speakers the wizard will end.
Speaker Sound reproduction via a loudspeaker system or
system active loudspeakers (connection to AUDIO OUT).
(AUDIO OUT) (1 How to connect a speaker system to AUDIO OUT,
see chapter External devices, section Connecting
the speaker system (AUDIO OUT).
How to configure a speaker system at AUDIO OUT,
see chapter System settings, section Connctions
– Adjusting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT).
If a speaker system is connected to AUDIO OUT
and you want to return to selecting TV speakers,
switch the subwoofer of the speaker system off
before you select the TV speakers. At the AUDIO
OUT connection, the audio signal is output with
maximum volume setting in the TV speaker
selection.
If you are using a speaker system at the AUDIO
OUT jack, the headphone volume can no longer
be controlled separately..
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Finish wizard with
Select Sound component.
For selectable items see below.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
HiFi/AV Sound reproduction via an external analogue or
amplifier digital audio amplifier.
How you connect a HiFi/AV amplifier see chapter
External devices, section Connecting the HiFi/
AV amplifier.
How you configure a HiFi/AV amplifier see chapter
System settings, section Connections –
Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier.
HiFi/AV Sound reproduction optionally via an external
amplifier or analogue or digital audio amplifier or via the built-in
TV speakers TV loudspeakers.
(switchable)
The selection options for switching between
sound components can be called via the function
list under Sound settings.
(1
Software version 2.1.x and higher.
102
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Connections
Adjusting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
Sound playback via ... – Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) (1
Enter here that you want to hear the TV sound via a speaker system
connected to AUDIO OUT.
Subwoofer + ext. front speakers
TV
loudspeakers
as centre
speaker
TV loudspeakers as centre speaker
...
Sound components
For information on navigation within the wizard, see chapter General
information on menu operation.
no
Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) was selected in the Sound
components wizard. Afterwards you can switch on the power switch
of the subwoofer.
Sound components
Please specify here whether you are using the
TV speakers with an additional subwoofer or if
you wish to connect a subwoofer + external
front speakers. (AUDIO OUT socket).
TV speakers + Subwoofer
Back with
TV
If you select no here, the external front speakers
also transmit the centre sound parts additionally.
Proceed to connect the Subwoofer.
Subwoofer + ext. front speakers
Proceed with
Select TV speakers + Subwoofer or Subwoofer
+ ext. front speakers.
Specify here whether you want to operate the
speakers of the TV set with an additional
subwoofer or a subwoofer with external front
speakers at the AUDIO OUT socket of the TV set.
Continue with the appropriate selection.
TV speakers + Subwoofer
Adjust subwoofer level
...
Sound components
Proceed with
TV
0dB
Adjust ext.
Speakers
level
Adjust
subwoofer
level
0dB
0dB
Select yes here if you want to use the built-in TV
speakers as centre speakers.
Connect speakers
...
TV
0dB
yes
Back with
If you are using a speaker system at the AUDIO OUT jack, the
headphone volume can no longer be controlled separately.
Connect
speakers
Please specify whether you want to use your
built-in TV speakers as active centre speakers of
your multi-channel speaker system.
You can adapt the volume of the subwoofer
optimally to the TV volume.
TV
TV
2dB
Adjust ext. Speakers level
...
Sound components
Here you can optimally adjust the volume of
the external sound system to the TV's volume.
TV
3dB
3dB
3dB
-12 dB
Back with
+3 dB
+12 dB
Finish wizard with
A
djust the volume of the ext. sound system
optimally to the TV volume.
An audio broadband signal is transmitted via
the AUDIO OUT jack. Therefore, the level of the
front speakers and the subwoofer varies
uniformly with the volume setting.
Back: Finish wizard.
Level
-12 dB
Back with
+2 dB
+12 dB
This ends the sound components wizard for connecting
and setting up a speakers system.
Finish wizard with
Adjust the volume for the subwoofer.
Back: Finish wizard.
This ends the sound components wizard for connecting
and setting up a speakers system.
(1
Available as of software version 2.1.x.
103
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Connections
Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier
Sound
formats
Sound formats
...
Sound components
Sound playback via ... - HiFi/AV amplifier
Please specify, what kind of sound formats can be processed by your
HiFi/AV amplifier and mark them by the button OK .
Stereo (PCM)
dts
The sound components wizard permits configuration of different
audio amplifiers (stereo amplifiers, surround amplifiers, analogue or
digital) with different digital audio formats (Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG,
and stereo/PCM). See the user guide of the audio amplifier for more
information.
MPEG
Dolby Digital
Back with
Proceed with
For information on navigation within the wizard see
chapter General information on menu operation.
HOME: Call Home view.
S
elect sound formats which can be decoded with
the digital amplifier (see operating manual of the
used amplifier).
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
OK adopt sound formats.
Select Connections,
go to next column.
Select Sound components,
Call sound components wizard.
Sound
reproduction
via ...
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD - Sound playback via ...
...
Sound components
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your
TV sound. If you do not want to listen exclusively via the built-in speakers,
all additional speakers or devices must be connected with the audio
output sockets AUDIO DIGITAL OUT.
If you have a TV set without built-in speakers, the items relating to the TV
speakers may not be selected.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the OK
button.
Proceed to next step.
Amplifier
Type
Amplifier Type
...
Sound components
Please specify which amplifier type is connected.
Surround amplifier
Back with
Stereo amplifier
Proceed with
TV speakers
Speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
HiFi/AV amplifier
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Proceed with
End with
M
ark HiFi/AV amplifier or HiFi/AV amplifier or
TV speakers (switchable),
OK Confirm selection.
HiFi/AV Select setting when an amplifier is connected and
amplifier the TV speakers are not used.
HiFi/AV
amplifier or
TV speakers
(switchable)
Select setting when an amplifier is connected and
the TV speakers are used. In the sound mode
selection the audio reproduction can then be
switched between the amplifier and the TV speakers.
Proceed to next step.
Type of sound
transmission
Type of sound transmission
...
Sound components
Please select whether the TV sound signal should be transmitted to the
HiFi/AV amplifier by a digital (via the SPDIF OUT) or analog (via the AUDIO
OUT) signal.
digital
Back with
analogue
Proceed with
Select whether the sound is to be transmitted
digitally or analogue to the the amplifier (see right
hand column):
digital: Proceed to Sound formats.
analogue: proceed to Type of amplifier.
104
P
lease select the amplifier type which is connected
(surround or stereo amplifier).
Back: Finish wizard.
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Connections
Antenna DVB
AV connection settings
Here you can make settings for the DVB-T antenna and call the antenna
wizard for the DVB-S antenna.
In the AV connection settings menu the parameters for the AV
connection socket can be adapted.
Call Antenna DVB
Calling the connections menu
HOME: Call Home view.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Mark Antenna DVB,
go to next column.
Mark AV connecting settings,
go to next column.
...
Antenna DVB
Antenna
DVB-S
The following antenna wizard guides you through all the
necessary settings relevant to your antenna system.
Antenna
DVB-T
...
Please input whether a device is connected to the AV
socket and if so, which device.
AV connecting settings
Signal type
Allow switching voltage
Select the desired setting,
call.
Select the desired setting,
call.
Explanations of the setting options in the antenna DVB menu:
Antenna Here the antenna wizard starts guiding you through
DVB-S all the settings relevant to the DVB-S antenna. The
settings of the DVB-S antenna wizard are explained
in the procedure of initial installation.
Antenna Here you can set whether your DVB-T antenna needs
DVB-T a supply voltage.
Antennas with an integrated amplifier need a supply
voltage on the antenna line. In this case, select
Supply voltage 5V and confirm with OK.
Otherwise, select No supply voltage and confirm
also with OK.
Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna
If you are receiving one or more DVB-T stations with picture and sound
interference then you should change the installation location and
alignment of the antenna. Ask your dealer to tell you which channels
are used to broadcast the DVB-T stations in your region.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the AV connecting settings
menu:
Device at Indicate here whether a set and, if yes, which one is
connection connected to the AV socket.
AV
Signal type You set the signal type of the device connected to AV
or AVS here. Normally, you should leave the setting to
Automatic VHS/SVHS; otherwise select a suitable
signal type. You can find out more from your dealer.
Allow If this function is activated, the video and audio of an
switching external unit connected to the AV connector (not at
voltage AVS) will immediately be reproduced on all TV broadcast sites when playback is started up, provided that
the external unit supplies a switching voltage.
A DVB-T station is received and selected.
Calling manual search (see chapter System settings, section Stations
– Manual TV/Radio scan).
Due to the preset stations, the signal source is already selected as
DVB-T. Position and align the antenna so that maximum C/N values
and levels are reached.
Search for DVB-T stations one after the other and compare values for
C/N and Level. Then position/align the antenna to the weakest station
so that maximum values for C/N and Level are obtained. The value
for BER should be as low as possible.
Thereafter, perform an automatic search for all DVB-T stations.
105
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Connections
Digital Link
Gaming mode
In the digital link menu you make further setting for comfortably linking
external devices to the TV set.
For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles, PC applications
or even Karaoke machines are operated, we recommend you to
activate the Gaming mode.
Call Digital Recorder Link menu
Your activities are then displayed quicker on the screen by reducing
the complex picture improving techniques.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Mark Digital Link,
OK call Digital Link.
...
Digital Link
Digital Link
Remote
Thus you can permit (on) or prohibit (off) automatic
communication between the TV set and external devices
connected to it (e.g. BluRay player) via the HDMI cable. One
of its functions is to switch these devices on and off
alternately.
Shutdown
This mode can be set separately for every input of your TV set.
Call Gaming mode menu
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Connections,
go to next column.
Select Gaming mode,
OK call.
Back
Set Gaming mode for inputs...
...
Gaming
mode
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
Select the desired setting,
call.
Retour
Mark/unmark with
OK
For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles, PC applications or even Karaoke machines are operated, we
recommend you to activate the "Gaming mode". Your activities are then displayed quicker on the screen by reducing
the complex, picture improving techniques. This mode can be set separately for every input of your TV set.
Explanations of the setting options in the Digital Link menu:
Digital Link Herewith you can allow or forbid the automatic
HD communication between the TV set and linked
functionality external devices (e.g., BluRay player). Among other
things, it's role is that these devices switch mutually
on and off.
Remote Here you can select whether the TV set is to switch
switch on of on automatically from Standby mode, if Digital Link
the TV set HD or Digital Link Plus capable devices connected
to an HDMI or to AV inputs start playback or display
a screen menu.
Select connection,
OK Gaming mode for selected connection on/off.
You can recognise AV connections with set Gaming
mode by the symbol after the connection name. A
is shown in the extended station list behind
dice icon
the corresponding AV input when filtering on the AV list.
Back
Expanded station list
1 HDMI 1
2 HDMI 2
3 HDMI 3
4 HDMI 4
5 PC IN
2 HDMI 2
6 AVS
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD Functionality ‫ ט‬on has been selected.
Shutdown of
the ext.
device via TV
button
You can select here whether the external Digital Link
HD device that is currently playing back should be
automatically shut down as soon as you switch back
to the TV or another AV channel.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD Functionality ‫ ט‬on has been selected.
106
7 AV
8 VIDEO
A..Z
Search
<
AV list
>
<
All stations
>
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Extras
Extras
Extras contains additional functions and settings (e.g., Integrated
features, Repeat initial installation, CA module settings).
Call Extras
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Extras,
go to next column.
Extras
Integrated
features
Here you can obtain information on the integrated
features of your TV set.
Repeat initial installatio
Reset to
factory settin
Select the desired setting,
call.
Explanation of the subitems of Extras
Integrated Call information on the integrated features of the TV
features set (see next page).
Repeat initial You can repeat the Initial installation again at any
installation time. You are guided through the various menus
where i.a. an automatic TV/radio station search is
automatically carried out.
Caution: All stored stations and all created personal
lists will be deleted by this!
I If a parental lock is activated, the access
code must be entered before repeating initial
installation.
Reset to Resetting various settings to their factory defaults
factory (see next page).
settings
CA module Make settings for your CA modules.
[Name]
This menu item appears only it at least one CA
module is plugged in.
The exact designation of the menu item and
available subitems depends on your CA module(s).
See chapter System settings, section Extras – CA
module for further information.
107
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Extras
Integrated features
Reset to factory settings
Here you can obtain information on the integrated features of the
TV set.
Here you can reset some of the settings to the factory default values.
See the rating plate on the rear of the set for the precise product
designation.
Call Reset to factory settings
HOME: Calling the Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Call Integrated features
Mark Extras,
go to next column.
HOME: Calling the Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Reset to factory settings,
OK call.
Mark Extras,
go to next column.
...
Mark Integrated features,
OK call Integrated features (1.
Entire TV Set
This resets the entire TV set to its factory settings.
Picture/
sound
Network
Back
Integrated features
...
Integrated
features
Hardware
Software
Manufacturer
Serial number
Article number
Chassis
CI Plus
Nicam
DD/DTS
PIP
Digital Recorder (DR+)
Channel 1
Channel 2
Wi-Fi module
HDMI
Upgrade
LOEWE
834
54443W50
SL320
PRODUCTION
Browser
Media data
base
A/T/T2/C/C2/S/S2
T/T2/C/C2/S/S2
Move content up and down with the cursor
Select a category you want to reset,
OK call.
Here you can obtain information on the integrated features of your TV set.
Select category (e.g. hardware, software,
etc.),
If necessary, scroll content up/down.
Hardware Under the Hardware item, you can find the article
and serial number of your TV set, the MAC address
and the chassis type with all existing hardware
components.
Software Under the item software, the current software version and the installed software features of your TV
set are displayed.
Upgrade Under the item Upgrade you can find the installed
software features with their respective status.
Activated: software feature is installed and can be
used.
Not active: software feature is installed, but can not
be used.
(1
Select Start reset,
OK call.
Entire TV Set This resets the entire TV set to factory defaults.
By resetting the entire TV set to the factory default
state, all the settings you made and all stored
stations will be deleted.
Thereafter, an initial installation of the TV set is
carried out again (see chapter Initial installation).
Picture/ The current image and sound parameters of your TV
sound set will be deleted and reset to the factory defaults.
Network The current network settings of your TV set will be
deleted and reset to the factory defaults.
HDMI The HDMI setting is reset to the factory settings.
Browser The current browser settings of your TV set will be
deleted and reset to the factory defaults.
All data stored in the course of use are deleted.
Media data Your current media database is deleted because
base the database is reinitialised. The information from
the removable media (USB) and possibly the DR+
archive are then re-read.
The system then automatically performs a system
reset.
The screen graphic displayed is only an example. Depending on the device type, the available hardware/software components may be different.
108
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Extras
Common Interface (CI / CI Plus)
Conditional Access module (CA module)
Common Interface, also called CI, is a interface in the TV set, into which
a Conditional Access Module (CA module, see right column) can be
plugged. The CA module and the smartcard from a corresponding Pay
TV supplier enable reception of encrypted stations.
In order to receive coded digital stations, a Conditional Access module
(CA module) and a Smart Card must be inserted in the CI slot of your
TV set.
Programme providers who use the CI Plus standard can assign
different rights for their broadcast programmes.
For instance, the programme provider can restrict or completely
prevent recording or later watching of an encoded programme.
If there are such regulations, these also apply to timeshift television
accordingly.
A screen message informs you of this fact, if you would like to record
such a programme. Recording is carried out in such a case (an
appropriate entry is displayed in the DR+ archive), later watching of
the programme, however, is not possible at all or only for a limited
period (e.g., 10 days).
A possible time limitation of the playback will also appear in the
corresponding entry in the DR+ archive.
The CA module and the Smart Card are not part of the set of
equipment supplied with the TV set. They are usually available from
your dealer. Loewe does not provide any guarantee for the functioning
of the CA module.
The TV set must first recognise and set up the CA module during initial
operation. Therefore, it can take up to a minute until decoding starts
during initial operation.
Inserting the Smart Card into the CA module
Push the Smart Card into the CA module as far as it will go. The side
of the card with the gold chip on it should be pointing towards the
thicker side of the insertion slot (see illustration). Note the direction
of the arrow printed on the Smart Card.
Contact side
CI Plus is an advanced development of the DVB Common Interface
Standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible to the
previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to
the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as
the programme provider permits this.
CA module
Smart Card
All restrictions mentioned here are the responsibilities of the
broadcaster. The TV simply values the signalling set by the
broadcaster as neutral.
Furthermore, the programme provider can prevent external copying
of protected programmes.
Inserting the CA module into the TV set’s CI slot
It could be necessary to enter the youth protection PIN of the CA
module when programming the data, if you want to record a CI Plus
protected programme, which has been protected against viewing by
minors.
The Parental lock PIN can also be stored in the TV set. The access code
of the TV set is required for watching the programme later.
Remove the cover from the rear of the set.
Switch off TV set using the mains switch.
Insert the CA module carefully into one of the two CI slots, ensuring
that the contact side goes in first. Do not use force. Make sure the
module is not twisted in the process. Push the CA module in as far as
it will go.
Software update for CI Plus capable CA modules
From time to time, there will be new system software for your CA
module software. There are two software update types.
Recommended update:
Information on an available update is displayed. You can either run this
or cancel the procedure. If you do not install the update, the information
will reappear in regular intervals until the update has been installed.
Forced update:
Information on an available update is displayed. The module does no
longer decode until the update has been successfully implemented.
Finally, close the side cover.
Troubleshooting (CA module)
The following information can help, if problems should occur when
running a CA module:
Switch the TV set off to the standby mode. Remove the CA-module
from the TV set. Switch the TV set off completely. Wait a few seconds.
Reinsert the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.
Should errors continue to occur, you will get further information
resulting from the two-digit error code (only with CI Plus capable
CA modules). You will find the table with the error codes in chapter
Miscellaneous, section CA module error codes. If in doubt, contact
your dealer.
109
„ Connect 32
User manual
System settings
Extras
Searching for scrambled stations
Station mapping
If no search for encrypted stations was performed during initial startup,
this can be done later using the search wizard.
If two CA modules are both used for the decoding of stations, you
decide here which station shall be decoded by which CA module.
HOME: Call Home view.
Select System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Automatic scan TV+Radio,
go to next column.
Select Change search settings,
OKwizard guides you through the search settings.
Under scrambled stations you have to select yes.
N
ext select Start search/update,
OK start updating the station list.
Calling CA module information
This menu is only available when a CA module is
plugged in.
HOME: Call Home view.
Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
Mark Extras,
go to next column.
Select desired CA module.
The indicated name depends on the inserted
CA module.
go to next column.
Select Module menu,
OK call information.
The content of this menu depends on the provider of
the CA module.
The station mapping settings will only be taken into account, if two
CA modules are plugged.
This menu item is only available if under Smartcard rights the
item Different rights was selected.
This statement refers explicitly to the CI slots of the TV set and not
to the modules plugged into it! When the modules are exchanged,
the mapping must be repeated.
Mark Station Mapping,
call station list.
Select CA module for mapping.
Mark station,
OK map station to the selected CA module / cancel
mapping.
Behind the assigned station is the number of the
corresponding CI slot.
Storage the PIN for recordings
Store the programme provider PIN belonging to your CA module in
order to decode CI plus programmes with parental lock for recording.
The menu option is available only if the plugged CA module supports
storing the parental lock PIN.
Mark Storage of PIN for recordings,
call PIN entry box.
Mark the desired CA module in the headline.
Go to the PIN input line, use the numerical keys
to enter the programme provider PIN.
Or:
Mark figure,
OK adopt figure to input line.
Smartcard rights
To conclude the entry:
If two CA modules are used in parallel to decode stations, you specify
here the rights of both smartcards.
Mark Adopt,
OK save PIN.
Mark Smartcard rights
go to next column.
Select Same rights or Different rights.
If you select Same rights, the TV set assumes that
both smartcards have the same rights and can be used
for Dual Recording in parallel. In this case, the Station
mapping function is not available.
When selecting Different rights, you can assign the
stations to be decoded to the respective CA module.
110
Removing the CA module
Switch off TV set using the mains switch.
Remove the cover from the rear of the set.
Pull the CA module out of the CI slot.
Replace the cover.
„ Connect 32
User manual
External devices
Playback from the device
Devices to the HDMI connections
The HDMI connections (High Definition Multimedia Interface) allow
the transmission of digital video and audio signals from a player (e.g.
DVD player, Blu-ray player, game console, camcorder, set-top box)
via a single cable.
The digital video and audio data are transmitted without data
compression digitally and therefore lose none of their quality.
A maximum of five devices can be connected in cascade to every HDMI
socket. The devices are arranged in the AV list and in the station list
below the appropriate HDMI socket. If the respective device sends
its own device name, this appears in place of the connection name.
Connecting the device
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the device by an HDMI cable (Type A, 19-pole) to one of the
HDMI sockets of the TV set.
An HDMI device is connected to the side HDMI socket (e.g. camcorder)
in the same way as shown in the figure.
Please note that not all signals may be represented on any HDMI
socket (see chapter Technical Data, section Signals via AV (PC
IN) / HDMI)
TV set
If the device at HDMI supports the Digital Link HD functionality, the
TV set will automatically switch to the corresponding HDMI input after
starting the replay at the HDMI device.
The HDMI input can also be called up manually:
Call AV list.
AV list
1
HDMI 1
2
HDMI 2
3
HDMI 3
4
HDMI 4
5
PC IN
6
AVS
Select HDMI socket.
With Digital Link HD-capable devices the device
name may possibly appear in place of the
connection name.
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected HDMI device. The
best possible format for the picture is detected and
set automatically.
Blu-ray player
HDMI
Renaming the HDMI port designation
The port designation of the HDMI jacks can be renamed manually.
Call AV list.
HDMI1
Select desired HDMI socket.
OK switch over.
MENU: Call function list.
Select Rename,
OK call.
Connection example of an HDMI device (e.g. Blu-ray Player)
Enter new name (information on how to enter
characters, see also section General information on
operation, section Entering characters with
on-screen keyboard).
Select adopt,
OK New name for the HDMI jack is adopted.
111
„ Connect 32
User manual
External devices
Switching between operation of TV set and HDMI device
using the TV key
Digital Link HD
Operation of Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) enabled devices
The Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) function allows Loewe television sets
to transmit the remote control signals via the HDMI connection of the
TV set to compatible HDMI devices (such as Loewe BluTechVison 3D).
You can therefore set up and use a concealed CEC capable HDMI
device.
Thus, you can install a concealed CEC-enabled HDMI device and
operate it easily.
You can select and operate the CEC-capable HDMI device in two
different ways. On the one hand, by using a device key (STB, VIDEO
or AUDIO) to switch to the operation of the HDMI device. On the
other hand, by using the TV key to switch between HDMI device and
the TV set.
Switching between operation of TV set and HDMI device using
a device key
Assign the HDMI CEC function (code 22) to the desired device key
(STB, VIDEO or AUDIO). The assignment is described in chapter
External devices, section Setting the remote control – Setting
the remote control for other Loewe devices.
Switching the control via the TV key is only possible when no device
key is assigned to the HDMI device you are using.
Call AV-List.
S
elect a HDMI socket to which the HDMI device
is connected.
Pressing TV for a longer period: switch remote control
commands between HDMI and TV operation.
A message on the screen informs you about the
currently selected mode.
Pressing briefly TV: Switch to TV mode (back to
previous station).
Automatically switching off external devices
When returning to TV mode by briefly pressing the TV key the external
device can be switched off.
Subsequently, the assignment of the HDMI device used to the preset
device key will be done.
You can find the settings in the System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ט‬
Digital Link ‫ ט‬Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button.
The CEC capable HDMI device is connected to one
of the HDMI sockets of the TV set and switched on.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ‫ט‬
on has been selected.
Press required button for 5 seconds.
A selection menu appears on the TV set.
Select HDMI device for key
Remote switch on of the tv set
Back
Select HDMI device for key
No device
BluTech Vision
You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from
Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a
Digital Link HD-enabled device.
You can find the settings in the System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ט‬
Digital Link ‫ ט‬Remote switch on of the tv set.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ‫ט‬
on has been selected.
Cancel
Switching off the TV set and connected devices (system standby)
Select required device from the list.
OK Accept.
The assignment of the device key and the
assignment of the HDMI device are completed.
Press the corresponding device key to switch to the
operation of the HDMI device.
The remote control commands are routed from the TV
set to the HDMI device.
Press the TV key to switch to the operation of the TV
set.
If the Auto off function (see right column) is enabled,
the HDMI device switches off.
112
The operation of the TV set must be enabled (see
above).
Press the key long: TV set and all CEC-enabled devices
connected to the HDMI ports will be switched off to
standby (system standby).
„ Connect 32
User manual
External devices
Devices on AV
The AV connection socket offers the possibility to connect e.g. a DVD
player, video/DVD recorder or PC via two different adapters.
The required adapters (Scart or VGA adapter) are available as an
accessory from your Loewe dealer (see chapter Accessories).
The AV sockets can process different signal types. Which signal type
your accessory device provides can be found in the operating manual
of the appropriate device.
Connecting a DVD player to the TV set
A DVD player has been selected in the System settings ‫ ט‬AV
connecting settings ‫ ט‬Device at connection AV.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket
using the Scart adaptor (1 .
Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available from your dealer) for this.
TV set
Owing to the large number of AV devices available on the market, we
can only mention a few examples for the connection of accessory
equipment to the AV socket here.
DVD player
AV
Remote TV switch on via Digital Link
You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from
Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a
Digital Link Plus-enabled device connected to AV.
AV
You can find the settings in the System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ט‬
Digital Link ‫ ט‬Remote switch on of the TV set.
Connection example of a DVD player
Playback from AV device
If the device at AV supports the Digital Link Plus functionality or if in
the System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ ט‬AV connecting settings ‫ט‬
Allow switching voltage ‫ ט‬yes, the TV set will automatically switch
to the corresponding AV input after starting the replay at the AV device.
The AV input can also be called manually, however.
Call AV list.
AV list
7
AV
8
VIDEO
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
Select AV,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
(1
Adaptor is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
113
„ Connect 32
User manual
External devices
Connecting a DVD recorder to the TV set
Connecting PC / Set-top box
A DVD recorder has been selected in the System settings ‫ט‬
Connections ‫ ט‬AV connecting settings ‫ ט‬Device at connection AV.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket
using the Scart adaptor (1 . Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available
from your dealer) for this.
If you want to receive and record analogue stations with the receiver
(tuner) built into the recorder, the recorder must be looped into the
aerial cable.
Connect the DVD recorder as shown in the connection example below.
You can connect a PC and thus use the TV screen as a monitor.
When connecting a PC or auxiliary device to the AV socket of the
TV set, adjust the output signal on your PC first so that it matches
one of the signals in the table in chapter Technical data, section
Signals via AV (PC IN) / HDMI.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the device to the TV set’s AV socket with a VGA cable and
the VGA adaptor (1.
Connect the analogue audio signal of the PC to the VGA adaptor via
the jack plug socket.
TV set
TV set
R
PC
AUDIO
VGA
TV
DVD recorder
ANT IN
AV
AV
ANT OUT
ANT TV
AV
Connection example of a PC
Playback from the device
Call AV list.
AV list
5
PC IN
6
AVS
7
AV
8
VIDEO
Connection example of a DVD recorder
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
Playback from AV device
Call AV list.
AV list
7
AV
8
VIDEO
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
Select PC IN,
OK switch over.
Adjusting the geometry of the PC picture
You can set the position (vertical, horizontal) and the phase position of
your PC. The settings you find under System settings ‫ ט‬Picture ‫ט‬
more ... ‫ ט‬PC IN - Display.
Select AV,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
Connecting devices with component connection (YPbPr / YUV)
External units with component connection YPbPr (often informally
referred to as YUV; see also Glossary) can be connected to the AV
socket of the TV set using two adaptors. In addition to the VGA adaptor,
a component VGA adaptor is required (available from your dealer).
The other units are connected as described in the left column.
(1
Adaptor is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
114
„ Connect 32
User manual
External devices
Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier
You can easily connect a speaker system using the AUDIO OUT
interface of your TV set.
Connecting digital HiFi/AV amplifiers
Switch off all devices before connecting the speaker system.
Connect the digital audio output of the TV set SPDIF OUT to the digital
audio input of the amplifier via a cinch cable:
TV set
The subwoofer is connected to the TV set via the AUDIO OUT
interface.
Connect the analogue audio output AUDIO OUT of the TV set with a
stereo cinch/jack adapter cable to the Line IN audio inputs left/right
of the subwoofer.
Digital amplifier
DIGITAL IN
Further information on the wiring of the speakers you find in the
instruction manual of the subwoofer or the speakers.
Only turn in the power switch of the subwoofer after having selected
the menu item Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) in the Sound
Component Wizard. Otherwise, the sound system will operate with
maximum volume.
SPDIF
OUT
If you are using a speaker system at the AUDIO OUT jack, the headphone volume can no longer be controlled separately.
Connect digital audio (pre) amplifier via audio return channel
(HDMI ARC)
TV set
Connect the HDMI1 socket of the TV using an HDMI cable with the
HDMI socket of the ARC-compatible audio (pre) amplifier (e.g.Loewe
MediaVision 3D). It is not necessary to log-in the amplifier separately
with the TV set.
AUDIO OUT
Line IN
left
Front
left
Line IN
right
Front
right
Connecting analogue HiFi/AV amplifiers
Use a stereo cinch/jack adaptor cable to connect the analogue audio
output AUDIO OUT to the analogue audio input of the amplifier:
TV set
Analogue amplifier
AUDIO IN
R
L
Subwoofer
AUDIO
OUT
Example of connecting a speaker system to your TV set
Configuration of the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
Reproducing sound via an HiFi/AV amplifier
When configuring the sound system in the sound components wizard
enter if you want to use e.g. external front speakers or how the TV
speaker is used (see chapter System settings, section Connections
– Sound components).
The sound reproduction via connected HiFi/AV amplifiers can be
adjusted in the sound components wizard (see chapter System settings, section Connections – Sound components).
Only turn in the power switch of the subwoofer after having selected
the menu item Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) in the Sound
Component Wizard. Otherwise, the sound system will operate with
maximum volume.
115
„ Connect 32
User manual
External devices
Audio playback from external devices
IR-Link
Connect external AV devices (e.g., MP3 player) for sound reproduction
to the AV inputs of the TV set.
The IR Link function allows the operation of concealed additional
devices made by other manufacturers via the Loewe TV set.
The remote control commands are passed from the IR receiver of
the TV set via an externally connected infrared transmitter to the
additional device.
The code system for remote control commands that control the
additional device is RC5.
The control of the additional device is only possible when the TV set
is switched on.
The infrared transmitter required is available as an accessory from
your dealer (see chapter Accessories).
Connecting an external appliance (e.g. MP3 player)
Connect the output (jack socket) of the MP3 player via the VGA
adaptor (1 to the AV socket of the TV set.
MP3 player
TV set
Connecting the infrared transmitter to the TV set
Insert the connector plug of the infrared transmitter into the RS-232C
socket of the TV set.
Lay the cable of the infrared transmitter to the front area of the additional device used.
AV
TV set
Connection example of an MP3 player
Select AV input
The selection of the AV input for a device at the AV socket
(connection as described above) is describe here as an example.
The procedure is similar to the selection of the other AV inputs.
RS-232C
Call up the AV list.
IR
AV list
7
AV
8
VIDEO
Note: If you press OK for
at least two seconds to
switch to the selected
channel, the screen
switches off and you will
only hear the sound.
With the button
(green), you can switch
the screen back on and
off.
Installing the infrared transmitter on the additional device
Find the right position on the desired device (optical connection
between transmitter diode and IR receiver of the concealed device).
Remove the protective film from the adhesive surface of the infrared
transmitter.
Attach the infrared transmitter at this position.
Mark desired AV source,
OK switch to AV source.
Start playback on the external device after selecting
the AV input.
Only playback of the audio signal from the AV source (screen
is off)
To play only the sound of a connected media player (e.g. MP3 player),
the AV sources can be selected so that the screen goes blank.
Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
Switching off the screen is possible for the AV sources HDMI1, HDMI2
and HDMI3 via the function list.
(1
Call up the AV list.
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12)
Select desired connection,
OK press at least for two seconds.
You can connect a home network system of different manufacturers
(e.g. AMX, Crestron) to your TV set via the RS-232C (RJ12) interface.
Green key: Press the green key to switch the the
screen on and off again.
As to the configuration of the RS-232C (RJ12) interface and for further
information on the various home networking systems contact your
dealer please.
Adaptor available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
116
„ Connect 32
User manual
External devices
Setting the remote control
Setting the remote control for other Loewe devices
Using the remote control for the TV mode of the TV set
You can operate various Loewe devices with the remote control. The
device keys STB – VIDEO – AUDIO can be reassigned to operate
different Loewe devices.
Press the TV key, the LED above it will light for approx.
5 seconds.
Press the required device key and the STOP key
simultaneously for 5 sec. until the corresponding LED
display flashes twice.
Using the remote control for a Loewe recorder
Then enter the two-digit device code from the list below.
The corresponding LED indicator light flashes twice.
Press the STB key, the LED above it will light for approx.
5 seconds.
Unit
Using the remote control for a Loewe player
Press the VIDEO key, the LED above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
Using the remote control for the radio mode of the TV set
Press the AUDIO key, the display above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
As long as a key is pressed, the LED for the selected operating mode
lights up (TV – STB – VIDEO – AUDIO). This allows you to check
which operating mode the remote control is set to every time you
press a button.
The factory setting of the keys is described above (see also table in
right hand column). The assignment of the buttons can be changed
to suit the existing accessory devices (see right hand column).
Code
Loewe ViewVision 8106 H
10
Loewe Viewvision, Centros 21x2
12
Loewe ViewVision DR+ DVB-T
13
Loewe Auro 2216 PS/8116 DT
14
Loewe BluTech Vision Interactive
15
Loewe Sound Projector
17
SetTopBox (STB) data base
18
Loewe TV - Digital radio
19
Loewe Mediacenter
20
Loewe BluTech Vision 3D
21
HDMI CEC mode
22
Loewe AudioVision
24
Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID
25
Apple IR codes
26
Apple IR codes (Apple TV-2G)
27
Loewe Soundbox
28
Loewe SoundVision
29
Loewe AirSpeaker
30
Loewe Soundport
31
Loewe MediaVision 3D
35
Restore defaults
99
Factory setting
Audio
VIDEO
Set unit for sound control function on the remote control
The keys for the sound control functions Volume ( 10 ) and Sound on/off
( 1 ) are programmed ex-factory to interact with the TV set. The unit to
be operated can be modified.
The device must first be placed on one of the device key of the
remote control (see right column) before the tone-control functions
can be changed to the appropriate device.
Press the TV key and the numerical key simultaneously for minimum 5 seconds. The LED above the
selected TV key flashes twice.
Function
Audio
Functions
Buttons
Unit
TV + 3
Auro/AudioVision/MediaVision 3D
TV + 4
Mediacenter
TV + 5
Loewe TV
TV + 6
Loewe TV with sound projector without system connection
STB
The codes shown here only apply to direct operation of the auxiliary
device device.
The available codes may vary depending on the status of the firmware in the remote control.
The factory setting of the device keys can vary depending on the
firmware version of the remote control
117
„ Connect 32
User manual
Teaching the remote control
Teaching the remote control
Teaching individual keys
By means of key code 18 (Set-Top Box data base) your remote control
Assist may be taught for your Set-Top Box (e.g., decoder, external cable
tuner). Thus, you spare yourself the use of several remote controls.
All keys (except the TV, STB, VIDEO and AUDIO device keys as well
as the V+/- keys and
) can be taught for the operation of units
which are not contained in the integrated data base. The functions of
the selected button are then completely or partially overwritten with
the new codes.
For the use of 2-digit key codes see chapter External devices,
section Setting the remote control.
The following options are available for teach-in:
- Entering a 3-digit code number
Place the TV remote control and the remote control to be replaced
in such a way that the infrared windows face each other at a distance
of 1-5 cm (see sketch).
- Read-out of the programmed Set-Top Box code
- Teaching individual keys
- Delete learned codes
In the following, the STB key is dealt with as an example since
device code 18 is preset for this key ex-works. Code 18 may also be
assigned to the VIDEO and AUDIO keys; the following description
applies accordingly.
Entering a 3-digit code number
The STB key can be programmed directly by means of a devicedependent 3-digit code. You find a list of these codes in chapter Code
page at the end of this instruction manual.
Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Enter the 3-digit code from the list. The LED above the
STB key lights up for 1 second.
OK end the programming mode. After a successful
programming the LED flashes twice.
When entering a wrong code number, the LED lights
up for 2 seconds. Do this programming once again.
Read-out of the programmed Set-Top Box code
The code of the currently programmed device on the STB key can be
indicated by the remote control.
Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Press INFO key.
The LED above the STB key shows the programmed
code by flashing. The figure "0" will be indicated by
flashing 5 times.
118
1-5 cm
Keep the STB and the red key simultaneously
depressed for five seconds. The LED above the STB
key lights up permanently.
Press key to be taught on the TV remote control.
The LED above the STB key flashes.
On the original remote control press the button
which is to be taught.
The LED above the selected STB key flashes twice.
If the code is not correctly recognised, the LED above
the STB key flashes ten times. Then repeat your entry
on the original remote control. If necessary correct the
allocation of the two remote controls. Continue with
the other buttons as described above.
To end the teaching mode, press the STB key again.
After 10 seconds without an entry the teaching mode
is automatically terminated.
It is possible that not all remote control codes can
be taught.
You can make a note of the functions, which you
have allocated to the keys, on the notes pages at the
end of this instruction manual.
„ Connect 32
User manual
Teaching the remote control
Deleting individual key functions
You can delete the taught function of an individual button.
Press STB and green key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LED above the STB key lights up permanently.
Press key to be deleted on the TV remote control.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Continue with the deletion of other buttons as
described above.
To end the deletion mode, press the STB key again.
The LED above the STB key flashes once.
Deleting all functions of the key for a device
You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the STB key.
Press STB and yellow key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Deleting all functions of the keys for all devices
You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the TV, STB,
VIDEO or AUDIO buttons.
Press STB and blue key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LEDs above the keys for the devices flash
twice.
119
„ Connect 32
User manual
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
The TV set switches off automatically.
The automatic shutdown switches off the Using automatic shutdown is recommended
TV set to save energy after 4 hours of for the purposes of energy saving and safety.
inactivity as soon as at least one signal input
group is set up in the energy efficient mode
Home Mode.
All menus are displayed in the wrong lan- The menu language was set incorrectly.
guage.
General problems when connecting external The Signal type is set incorrectly.
devices via an AV input.
Remedy / Instructions
Set the menu language:
Press HOME key. Call last menu item
(bottom left). Mark the fourth item from above
in the following list and move to next column to
the right. Call first list item with OK. Select the
language and confirm it with OK.
Set the correct signal type (System settings
‫ ט‬Connections ‫ ט‬AV connection settings
‫ט‬Signal type).
If AV standard or Signal type is set to
“Automatic” then this can lead to false
detections with non-standard signals. In this
case standard and signal must be set according
to the information in the operating manual of
the external device.
With Teletext various characters are The wrong character set has been set in the Set the correct character set: System
displayed incorrectly.
System settings.
settings ‫ ט‬Control ‫ ט‬more ... ‫ ט‬Standard
Teletext ‫ ט‬Character set ‫ ט‬Standard or
select the appropriate character set.
Errors occurred when running a CA module.
Switch the TV set off. Remove the CA-module
from the TV set. Wait a few seconds. Reinsert
the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.
No sound via the external digital audio am- a) The external digital audio amplifier does a) Set PCM stereo on the DVD player in the
sound selection. For DVB stations switch
plifier.
not support the selected sound format
Language/Sound
(Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG).
b) TV set and external digital audio amplifier b) Connect SPDIF OUT from the TV set to a
digital input of the external digital audio
are not connected with each other.
amplifier and select the appropriate input
to this.
A programmed recording was not made.
The provider deleted the programme from
the EPG data, for example due to a programme
change.
The station from which the recording was
made does not support automatic time
control (Accurate Recording).
Only the broadcasting organisations are
responsible for transmitting data for the
automatic time control. The availability of
the appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.
There is no start or end of a programmed The transmission time of the program was Only the broadcasting organisations are
recording although the automatic time delayed and the channel from which the responsible for transmitting data for the
control (Accurate Recording) was used.
recording was made has not updated the data. automatic time control. The availability of
the appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.
No IP address will be issued to your TV set in No DHCP server is working on your network. Set up a DHCP server.
spite of automatic IP configuration.
Assign the IP addresses for the TV set
manually.
120
„ Connect 32
User manual
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible cause
Remedy / Instructions
Despite video or music file being played back, a) The TV set is set to mute or the volume has a) Increase the volume by pressing the V+ key
on the remote control for a longer time. This
no sound can be heard.
been turned down too much.
will also cancel any mute setting.
b) An audio device that does not exist or that b) Connect the audio device and switch it on.
In the Sound components wizard change
is not connected, is registered under
back to TV speakers.
System settings ‫ ט‬Connections ‫ט‬
Sound components (e.g., HiFi/AV amplifier).
A media file that is displayed can not be played The format of the file is not supported (see also No remedy.
back.
limitations in chapter Technical data, section
Media – File formats supported.
Characters received in the WLAN code of the The device does not support all special Change the WLAN key of the router.
wireless router cannot be entered for the characters.
network configuration at the TV set.
When searching for wireless routers, no The router is not ready for wireless Check your wireless router.
device is found.
communication.
Try to make the connection again a few
minutes later.
121
„ Connect 32
User manual
Technical Data
Technical data
Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.
Loewe device type:
Connect 32
Part number:
54446xxx
EU energy efficiency class:
see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/my-loewe
Screen diagonal:
81 cm / 32 inch
Power consumption On-Mode (max.)
(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value):
Power consumption On-Mode (home) (1:
Annual energy consumption (1:
73,0 W
see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/my-loewe
Power consumption Standby Mode:
Power consumption when set is switched off:
0,40 W
0W
Resolution:
Full HD 1920 x 1080 px
Display technology / Picture format:
LCD with Edge-LED-Backlight / 16:9
Viewing angle (horizontal / vertical):
178° / 178°
Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D):
Device dimensions with stand (2 (W x H x D):
72,9 x 47,7 x 5,3 cm
72,9 x 50,8 x 21,3 cm
Weight without stand (approximate):
Weight with stand (2 (approximate):
9,7 kg
11,7 kg
Ambient temperature:
5° C – 35° C
Relative humidity (non-condensing):
20 – 80%
Air pressure:
800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)
Chassis designation:
SL 310F
Power supply:
220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz
Tuner:
terr./cable:
Satellite:
VHF/Hyperband/UHF
4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494
Range:
terr./cable:
Satellite:
Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz
Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz
Station storage locations incl. AV and radio:
TV standards:
6000
analogue:
digital:
Colour standards:
B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N
DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 30 Hz)
SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)
Sound formats:
analogue (FM):
analogue (NICAM):
digital (MPEG):
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse, Dolby MS11
Audio output power (sine / music):
2 x 20W / 2 x 40W
Acoustic speaker concept:
Speaker Box
Teletext:
TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)
Page memory:
2000
LAN:
WLAN:
Standards supported:
Standards supported:
Frequency range used:
Types of encoding that are supported:
Home networking standard:
(3
File formats supported :
10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac
2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz
WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES
Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)
Pictures:
Audio:
Video:
JPEG, PNG
MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis
AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, AC3, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),
MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),
MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AC3), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263, MP3, AAC
LC), MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2 Audio, AC3),
VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, AC3)
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)
(1
The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the
way the TV set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).
(2
Supplied mounting option: Table Stand Connect 32.
(3
For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.
122
n Connect 32
User manual
Technical Data
Signals via AV (PC IN) / HDMI
Signal input groups
The following table shows the compatible signals which may be represented by your TV set using the appropriate adapter at the AV connection (PC IN) or at the HDMI connections (HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3)
In your TV set the signals are sorted in various signal input groups
according to their source. In addition to the source, the type of signal
is also distinguished.
Set the output signal on your device so that it matches one of the
signals in the table.
For each signal input group, there are individual values for the picture
settings.
lease note that not all signals may be represented at every HDMI
P
socket or at AV (PC IN).
(1
Connection
Signal Signal source/Signal type
group name
Format
Horizontal
x Vertical
Frame
frequency
480i60
720 x 480i
60Hz
PC IN
576i50
720 x 576i
50Hz
PC IN
480p60
720 x 480p
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
576p50
720 x 576p
50Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
720p50
1280 x 720p
50Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
720p60
1280 x 720p
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
1080i50
1920 x 1080i
50Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
HD Media full screen display of HD videos via USB, Network,
Player VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)
1080i60
1920 x 1080i
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
HD HDMI Playback of HD videos via HDMI, e.g., Blu-Ray player
1080p24
1920 x 1080p
24Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
1080p25
1920 x 1080p
25Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
1080p30
1920 x 1080p
30Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
1080p50
1920 x 1080p
50Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
1080p60
1920 x 1080p
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
VGA
640 x 480
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
SVGA
800 x 600
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
XGA
1024 x 768
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
WXGA
1360 x 768
60Hz
HDMI 1-3
SXGA
1280 x 1024
60Hz
PC IN, HDMI 1-3
SD Analog cable analogue, interfaces AV, AVS, PC IN (1 (SD)
SD Digital DVB (SD), DR+ (SD), MPEG-Encoder
SD Media full screen display of SD videos via USB, Network,
Player VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)
SD HDMI Playback of SD video via HDMI, e.g., DVD player
HD Analog PC IN (1 (HD)
HD Digital DVB (HD), DR+ (HD)
Photo Player Playback of Photos via USB and network
Browser Display of Web sites in the Browser (incl. Media apps)
VGA PC IN (1 (PC) or HDMI (PC)
with VGA adaptor on AV connection.
123
„ Connect 32
User manual
Accessories
Accessories
The following accessories are obtainable from your Loewe dealer.
Mounting options:
A variety of options for mounting your TV set on the floor, table, and
wall are available.
An overview of the available placement options can be found in the
chapter accessories, section placement options.
Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables
USB extension (part no. 70167080):
To ensure the accessibility of the USB connections or to be able
to insert USB sticks with a large housing, a USB extension can be
connected to the TV set. You can purchase the USB extension via
your Loewe dealer.
Adapter Micro-AV / 25cm / Scart (part no. 72150080) set of 3:
Loewe sound systems:
You can combine your TV set with Loewe sound components. Several
possible combinations of speakers and subwoofers are available.
The Loewe scart adaptor allows you to extend your TV set by adding
an AV socket to connect, e.g., DVD players or DVD recorders.
Adapter Micro-AV / 25cm / VGA (part no. 72155080) set of 3:
Loewe Blu-ray player:
With the Loewe Blu-ray player BluTech Vision 3D you’re fully kitted
out to watch Blu-ray discs with 2D and 3D material. With the Loewe
system integration you control BluTech Vision 3D and your Loewe TV
set simultaneously using the Assist remote control.
The VGA adaptor enables the connection of a PC monitor or a Settop box.
Additionally to the video inputs, the adaptor for VGA is equipped with
a 3.5 mm stereo jack socket for analogue sound.
Converter RJ12 / 5m / IR (part no. 70533082) set of 3:
Loewe MediaVision 3D:
Loewe MediaVision 3D is partly an audio system: It plays your favourite
sound via the integrated iPod/iPhone dock and automatically identifies
songs or film music with the MusicID function. Loewe MediaVision
3D is also a home cinema system, ensuring a perfect all-round audio
visual experience - thanks to the fast and precise Full-HD 3D Bluray drive and a 5.1 decoder. Not least, Loewe MediaVision 3D is a
colourful feast for the eyes: because it can be beautifully customised
by individual intarsia.
Converter of RJ12 to an IR transmitter to operate concealed additional
devices of other manufacturers via the Loewe TV set.
Adapter RJ12 / 2,5m / RS232 (part no. 70499082) set of 3:
RJ12 to 9-pin Sub-D connector adaptor cable for the integration of
the TV set in professional home automation systems, such as GIRA,
CRESTRON, AMX.
Feature Upgrade Stick SL3xx (part no. 72341080):
Loewe Assist Easy:
The reduced focused design of Loewe Assist Easy remote control
guarantees survey at first sight, nevertheless all important functions
are controllable with one hand. Therefore it is the optimal control centre
of the new user interface Loewe Assist Media. As a multifunctional
remote control it is able to control further Loewe products in addition.
Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts M6x32 (part. no. 90473988):
Mounting a Loewe flatscreen TV set to a holder according to the VESA
standard necessarily requires the use of Loewe Vesa adaptor bolts
to prevent damage to the TV set.
See chapter Accessories, section VESA standard for further
information.
Subject to availability.
124
By means of the feature upgrade stick you can expand the functionality
of your Loewe TV set. After any necessary software updates and
plugging in the feature upgrade stick, the new features such as
Bluetooth music player (audio streaming), Bluetooth keyboard, etc.
are available.
DR+ Feature Disk (part no. 72462W00):
Like the Feature Upgrade Stick SL3xx the DR+ Feature Disk also
expands the functionality of your Loewe TV set. After any necessary
software updates and plugging in the DR+ Feature Disk, the new
features are available.
The DR+ Feature Disk represents a recording medium for your TV set.
Just quickly record and view your desired TV programmes, of course,
whenever you want it.
„ Connect 32
User manual
Accessories
Mounting options
Vesa Size 100
Wall Mount WM 68
Wall Mount Isoflex 32-55
Connect 32: 71388T20
Connect 55: included in delivery (WM 67)
Connect 48: 72115W80 (WM 67)
Connect 40: 72115W80 (WM 67)
Connect 32: 72345W00 (WM 68)
Connect 32: 71363B00 (2
Table Stand Connect 32
Connect 55: 72111Q80
Connect 48: included in delivery
Connect 40: included in delivery
Connect 32: included in delivery
Floor Stand Universal 32-55
Connect 32: 72190B00
(1
Screen Lift Plus
Connect 32: 65486B10 (2
(1
(2
Floor Stand Connect 32-40
Connect 32: 72435Q00
Wall Stand Flex 32-46
Connect 32: 71277B00
(2
Loewe Rack TS
Different versions, sizes and colours
available to match Loewe TV, sound system
and equipment
Only in conjunction with appropriate adaptor to be ordered separately.
Only in conjunction with VESA Size 100 adapter.
125
„ Connect 32
User manual
Accessories
VESA standard
Instructions on using third-party mounting options according
to the VESA standard
Loewe flat screen TV sets are specified for Loewe accessories. When
using third-party mounting options according to the VESA standard,
the manufacturer‘s instructions on the mounting options must be
observed.
Loewe accepts no liability for the use of mounting options from other
manufacturers.
On the rear wall of the TV set, there are four points of screw connections
to receive the VESA adapter bolts.
Mounting a Loewe flat screen TV set to a holder according to the VESA
standard necessarily requires the use of Loewe VESA adaptor bolts.
Otherwise, the TV set may be damaged.
Screw the Loewe VESA adapter bolts with a torque of approx. 4 Nm
into the screwing points of the TV rear panel (see Fig. 1).
First, possibly existing screws in the four screwing points must be
removed.
1
2
D
The Loewe VESA adaptor bolts are used to ensure stability and the
necessary minimum distance of 5 mm between rear wall of the TV
set and VESA holder (see Fig. 2). The VESA holder must not rest on
the rear panel.
When mounting the TV set, always check that all four Loewe VESA
adaptor bolts are used. For each mounting point, only one VESA
adapter bolt may be used. It is inadmissible to screw several VESA
adapter bolts or extend individual adapter bolts.
Measure the hole distance between the screwing points of your TV
set. A hole distance of 400 x 400 mm on the rear of the TV set means
VESA 400 standard.
Thus, a suitable mount bracket must also correspond to the VESA 400
standard. If the VESA standard of your TV set fits the standard of the
desired bracket, the bracket has also to be approved for the weight
and size of the TV set (for weight and TV set size refer to chapter
Technical Data).
Loewe is not responsible for the permissible load-carrying capacity
and the professional fixing of the holder.
Please observe additionally and definitely the points described in the
chapter on safety instructions.
If you use a Vesa mounting options from other manufacturers, you
can order the Vesa adapter bolts M6x32 (No. 90473.988) at your
authorized dealer of Loewe.
126
Environment
n Connect 32
Legal information
User manual
Environment / Legal information
Environmental protection
Licences
Power consumption
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Your TV set is equipped with an eco-standby power supply. In the
standby mode, the power consumption drops to low power (see
chapter Technical data). If you want to save even more energy then
switch the device off with the mains switch. Please also note that
the EPG data (Electronic Programme Guide) is lost under certain
circumstances and possibly programmed timer recordings cannot
be carried out by the TV set.
he TV set will be completely separated from mains only when you
T
unplug the mains cable.
The power consumed by the TV set during operation depends on the
energy efficiency preset in the initial installation or on the setting in
the system settings.
If you activate the automatic dimming, your TV picture will adapt to
the ambient brightness. This reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
If the TV set is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume,
programme change, etc.) the TV set will automatically switch to standby mode to save energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process
appears one minute before expiry of the 4 hours.
Cardboard box and packaging
You have made a decision to purchase a high-quality technical product
with a long service life. For disposal of the packaging, we have paid a
fee to a commissioned recycler to pick up the packaging from the
dealer in accordance with national legislation.
The device
The EU directive 2012/19/EU regulates the proper
way to recycle, handle and utilise used electronic
devices. Old electronic appliances must therefore
be disposed of separately. Never dispose of this device
in normal domestic waste!
You can hand in your old unit free of charge at identified
collection points or to your dealer if you buy a similar new unit. Other
details about re-acceptance (also for non-EU countries) are available
from your local municipal administration.
Batteries
The batteries supplied as initial equipment do not
contain any pollutants such as cadmium, lead, or
mercury.
In accordance with the Battery Directive, used
batteries should no longer be disposed of in the
domestic waste. Dispose of your batteries at no
charge in the collection containers which are set up
for this purpose in retail stores.
This set contains a software which is partly based on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).
This software is provided by the OpenSSL project “as is“ and any
expressed or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the OpenSSL project
or its contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including,
but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss
of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused
and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or
tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the
use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.
com).
This product contains software which was developed by third parties
and / or software which is subject to GNU General Public License (GPL)
and/or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). You can pass on
and modify them in accordance with Version 2 of the GNU General
Public License or optionally every later version which is published by
the Free Software Foundation.
The publication of this programme by Loewe is carried out WITHOUT
ANY GUARANTEE OR SUPPORT, particularly without an implicit
guarantee concerning MARKET MATURITY or the USABILITY FOR A
SPECIFIC PURPOSE. Details can be found in the GNU General Public
License. You can obtain the software via the Loewe customer service
department.
The GNU General Public License can be downloaded from:
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
127
„ Connect 32
User manual
Miscellaneous
CA module error codes
In case of problems with a CA module, error codes are displayed by TV set. The following table from the CI specification shows the meaning
of the error codes.
Error
Code +
Error condition
Error detected by
Host action
CI Plus Module action
00
N/A
None
None
01
CICAM
CICAM goes to pass - through mode (1.
02
CICAM
- CICAM goes to pass-through mode (1.
- a revocation notification message is displayed.
03
CICAM/Host
- If EMI>0 CICAM goes to pass-through mode, otherwise
switches to DVB CI mode
- a response error notification message is displayed.
The service operator and CAS may
choose under what conditions to
descramble when operating in DVB
CI mode.
04
CICAM/Host
- If EMI>0 CICAM goes to pass-through mode, otherwise
switches to DVB CI mode
- a response error notification message is displayed.
The service operator and CAS may
choose under what conditions to
descramble when operating in DVB
CI mode.
05
CICAM
None
Recommended:
- CICAM retries the download 2 times
- a response error notification message is displayed.
06
CICAM
None
Recommended:
- CICAM retries the download 2 times
- a response error notification message is displayed.
07
CICAM
None
Recommended:
- CICAM retries the download 2 times
- a response error notification message is displayed.
08
CICAM
None
CICAM goes to pass - through mode
09
CICAM/Host
Host stops the CICAM.
CICAM goes to pass - through mode
10
CICAM/Host
Host stops the CICAM.
CICAM goes to pass - through mode
11
CICAM/Host
Host stops the CICAM.
CICAM goes to pass - through mode
12
CICAM/Host
Host stops the CICAM.
CICAM goes to pass - through mode
13
Host
Host stops the CICAM.
None
14
Host
Host goes to DVB-CI
mode (2.
None
15
Host
Host stops the CICAM.
None
16
CICAM
None
- CICAM goes to pass- through mode
- a response error notification message is displayed.
17
CICAM
None
- CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode (3
- a response error notification message is displayed.
18
CICAM
None
- CICAM goes to pass- through mode
- a response error notification message is displayed.
19
CICAM
None
- CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode (3
- a response error notification message is displayed.
20
CICAM
None
- CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode (3
- a response error notification message is displayed.
21
CICAM
None
- CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode (3
- a response error notification message is displayed.
22
CICAM Requires
Update
CICAM
None
- CICAM goes to pass- through mode
- a response error notification message is displayed.
23-127
Reserved for CI
Plus
CICAM
None
- a response error notification message is displayed.
128-255
Private Use for
Service Operator
CICAM
None
- a response error notification message is displayed.
(1
The CICAM relays the transport stream unaltered and does not descramble any services (CI Plus or DVB).
The Host behaves like a DVB - CI compliant Host.
(3
The CICAM descrambles only services that require no CI Plus prote ction (DVB-CI fallback mode).
(2
128
Comments
„ Connect 32
User manual
Glossary
0-9
24p motion picture display: Movies released on Blu-ray Disc support the 24p motion picture display. The Blu-ray player transfers the
original film format to the television with 24 frames per second. The
DMM (DigitalMovieMode) set in the factory calculates and inserts
additional intermediate pictures, which suppress film jerking typical
for the cinema, thereby providing for a smooth motion sequence.
Common Interface: The Common Interface (CI slot) is a standardised interface. By inserting suitable decoding modules (CA modules)
and a Smart Card coded digital programmes can be used.
Common Interface Plus: CI Plus is an advancement of the Common
Interface standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible
to the previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots,
as far as the programme provider permits this. Additionally, extended
regulations apply however to CI Plus.
A
Component: See Component connection.
Administrator: Person who administers the network, i.e. takes care of
setting up and maintaining all components belonging to the network.
Active antenna: An antenna with its own power supply or amplification
which can improve the reception in areas with a poor coverage.
Component connection: Also referred to as Component. Connection where the video signal is transferred via three separate (Cinch)
connections. It comprises the brightness signal Y as well as the colour
difference signals Pb (blue component) and Pr (red component).
ARC: Abbreviation for Audio Return Channel.
Conditional Access module: See CA module.
Audio Return Channel: The audio return channel which was introduced
with the HDMI Standard 1.4 is used when an audio system with audio
(pre) amplifier, e.g. Loewe MediaVision 3D, is connected to a TV set via
HDMI. The digital audio signal of the TV set (e.g. the sound of the current TV program) can be transferred to the audio amplifier via the audio
return channel of the HDMI cable. Thus the same cable which is normally
responsible for transferring image data from a connected media player to
the TV set transfers the audio data in the opposite direction. In this way, the
audio return channel makes the cinch cable, which has previously been
required in addition to the HDMI cable, redundant.
Automatic time control: Also called Accurate Recording. Similar to
VPS for analogue stations the automatic time control monitors the start
and end times of programmes from DVB stations. If these times deviate
from the data programmed in the timer data, the running time of the
recording is adapted automatically. The automatic time control is not
supported by all DVB stations.
D
DHCP: Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. DHCP
allows automatic assignment of IP addresses with the aid of a DHCP
server.
DHCP server: Network service which takes care of automatic assignment of IP addresses to clients.
Digital Link HD: System for controlling units via the HDMI connection
of the Loewe TV set when they have been set up in a covered position.
DMM: Abbreviation for Digital Movie Mode. Whether a studio recording, live broadcast, or feature film – the broadcast images are always
displayed optimally. Still images are reproduced in all their sharpness
and tranquillity. By creating intermediate images, DMM enables perfect
studio quality, even with quick movements.
AV sources: Audio/Video source.
DNC: Abbreviation for “Digital Noise Control”. Weak TV signals (analogue) can generate disruptive picture noise. DNC adjusts the effect
of digital noise reduction to the picture contents.
AVI: Abbreviation for Audio Video Interleave, a video container file
format developed by Microsoft. A single AVI video file can contain
several audio, video and text data streams (thus the name container
format).
DNS: Abbreviation for Domain Name System. Readable names (e.g.
www.loewe-int.de) are assigned to numerical IP addresses. DNS
servers are responsible for the resolution of readable addresses into
the corresponding IP addresses.
B
DRM: Digital Rights Management. Processes to control copyright
protected data. To be used correctly, DRM protected contents require
not only a DRM capable device but also the possession of a license
issued by the provider (to be paid for).
AV socket: Socket for audio and video signals.
Band: Name for a transmission range.
Blu-ray Disc: The follow-up format of DVD. The contents of about
five DVDs fit onto one Blu-ray Disc (abbreviated BD). Therefore, the
Blu-ray disc provides enough space for high-resolution images and
multi-channel sound formats.C
BMP: Abbreviation for Bitmap, a grid graphics format designed for
Microsoft Windows and OS/2 that is wide spread and therefore supported by almost every popular graphics software package without
any problems.
C
CA Module: The Conditional Access module contains the coding system and compares the transmitted code with the one on the
Smart Card. If they match, the appropriate stations or programmes
are decoded.
CEC: Abbreviation for Consumer Electronics Control. CEC provides universal component control functions for entertainment electronics devices
(e.g. System standby, One Touch Play). CEC is referred to by Loewe as
Digital Link HD.
Channel (WLAN): Devices that want to communicate with each other
have to use the same WiFi channel. In Europe the WiFi frequency band
is currently divided into 13 channels.
Cinch cable: Cable for transmitting sound or pictures.
DTS: Digital Theatre Systems; Digital multi-channel audio.
DVB-C/-S/-T: Digital Video Broadcasting stands for digital television.
Technical DVB is the standardised process for transmitting digital
content (television, radio, multi-channel audio, room sound, EPG,
Teletext, and other supplemental services) through digital technology.
CST for terrestrial or antenna distribution.
DVD: Abbreviation for Digital Video Disc and later Digital Versatile Disc.
DVD preceiver: Combi device of DVD player and radio without integrated amplifier.
Dynamic contrast ratio: Here the light intensity of the display is
adapted in case of a high black content in the picture. The so-called
backlights are dimmed automatically and the contrast ratio increases
temporarily, i.e. dynamically.
E
Electronic Programme Guide: See EPG.
EPG: Electronic Programme Guide is the electronic variant of a printed
TV guide. Using the EPG you can watch the TV programme of the TV
station, transfer the appropriate data. The list of programmes contains
the title, beginning and end and duration of the programme. In addition
brief descriptions of the content of the programmes are also displayed.
CI slot: See Common Interface.
Ethernet: Cable linked data net technology for local networks (LANs).
Also covers standards for e.g. plug connectors and transfer speeds.
Client: Also called network client, describes an end device such as
your TV set that is connected to the network and gets data from a
(media) server to make it accessible to the user.
Euro AV socket: Interface for connecting video devices to a TV set.
This socket is also referred to as Scart socket.
129
„ Connect 32
User manual
Glossary
Exif: Standard format for additional data with modern digital cameras,
e.g. date and time, aperture, light sensitivity, alignment of the camera
(portrait/landscape).
F
FLOF: Full Level One Facilities. Teletext system in which names and
numbers of the jump destinations are transmitted in the bottom line
on every page. This guides the reader to related topics for example. An
information about which pages exist and which pages have sub-pages
is not available in FLOF.
G
Gateway: Transition to another network; in this case connection from
the home network to the Internet.
The network device that establishes this connection is normally used
as a standard gateway. As a rule, the DSL router also represents the
Internet gateway.
H
HbbTV: HbbTV (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) is an industry
standard that offers an open platform for technology that is not dependent on manufacturers. HbbTV combines TV programmes with online
services seamlessly over broadband Internet (DSL).
HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. Coding system
provided for the DVI and HDMI interfaces for secure transmission of
audio and video data.
LNB/LNC: The crucial electronic component of a satellite antenna
is referred to as an LNB (Low Noise Block Converter). It is mounted
in the focal point of a parabolic antenna. The designation LNC (Low
Noise Converter) indicates that conversion to a lower intermediate
frequency takes place. The supplemental block in the LNB refers to the
fact that a whole frequency range (a block) is converted in each case.
M
MAC address: Hardware address of a network adaptor, e.g., he network card in the PC. It is issued permanently by the manufacturer and
is used to uniquely identify devices in networks.
Mbit/sec: Information about the transfer rate in networks in megabits,
i.e. millions of characters per second. With WLAN the maximum speed
is 11 (IEEE 802.11b), 54 (IEEE 802.11g) or 300 (IEEE 802.11n) Mbit/
sec, in wired networks 10 Mbit/sec or 100 Mbit/sec (Fast Ethernet).
Media Server: Stands for the device on which multimedia content
is stored, but is also the name for the service provided by the device
that makes this data available to the network.
Modulator: Transmitter in the video or DVD recorder so that the
devices can receive signals via the tuner of the TV device.
Mono: Single channel sound.
MP3: Data format for compressed audio files.
MPEG: Digital compression method for video.
Multimedia content: Videos, music files and photos are grouped
together under this term.
HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface, represents a newly developed interface for the fully digital transfer of audio and video data.
N
HD Ready: A quality seal that is awarded to products that are capable
of displaying high-definition television (HDTV).
NAS: The term describes a hard disk which is independently linked
to the network (i.e. without a PC).
HDTV (HD): High Definition Television is a collective term, designating
a series of high-resolution television standards.
Network ID: NID refers to the so-called programme ID number, also
known as network ID – a number between 0 and 8191. This specification is necessary in specific cable networks of some countries. Then
only DVB signals of this station network are searched for.
High and low band: Transmission ranges for satellites.
Host: Computer that the server services are provided from, i.e. that
makes data available. Refer also to media server.
I
ID3 tags: Additional information for MP3 and WMA audio files. Information about the singer, title, album and album cover can be saved
here among other things. This data is then processed by the PC using
an ID3 tag editor.
IP address: IP addresses (Internet Protocol Addresses) are used to
identify devices in an Internet Protocol (IP) network. IP addresses are
made up of four groups of numbers of three digits each.
IR-Link: The IR Link function allows the operation of accessory devices with concealed installation made by other manufacturers via the
Loewe TV set. The infrared sensor required for this is available as an accessory and can be connected to the IR-Link connection of the TV set.
NICAM: Audio standard. Is used in Denmark, England, France, Sweden, and Spain.
NTSC: American colour standard, stands for National Television
Standards Committee.
P
Page Catching: For teletext, refers to marking and calling a page
number.
PAL: European colour standard, stands for phase alternation line.
PCM: Pulse Code Modulation for digital sound.
Picture in Picture: See PIP.
PIP: Picture in Picture; a function which displays two pictures on the
screen.
J
Pixel: Also called picture element or pel. Denotes both the smallest
unit of a digital graphic grid and its display on a screen with grid control.
JPEG/JPG: Joint Photographic Experts Group is a committee, which
has developed a standardised method for the compression of digital
images. This method JPEG (JPG for short), named after the committee, is a commonly used graphic format for photos.
Pixel error: A pixel error is a defective pixel, usually on an LCD. Pixel
errors may be caused by production errors. They are expressed for
example by a constantly lit pixel or a constantly black pixel. Single
defective pixels however are excluded from a guarantee.
L
PNG: Abbreviation for Portable Network Graphics, a freely available
grid graphics format for loss-free compression.
LAN: Abbreviation for Local Area Network. Mainly used as a name for
networks with cabling (Ethernet).
Port: It allows assignment of data packages to various services which
are running on one device under the same network address.
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.
Powerline: Powerline designates a type of wired network connection
in which data is transferred via the domestic electricity network using
optionally available adaptors.
LCN: Logical Channel Numbers. In stations with LCN, the channel
location number belonging to the station is also transmitted by the
provider. The stations are sorted according to these channel location
numbers.
130
„ Connect 32
User manual
Glossary
P (continuation)
W
Progressive JPEG: Progressive JPEGs are built up gradually. The
quality of the picture increases progressively during the loading
process.
WEP: Abbreviation for Wired Equivalent Privacy. Former standard
process in the WiFi encryption, now outdated.
ProScan/Progressive Scan: Progressive Scan (abbr. PS) or full
picture method is a technique in the picture build-up of monitors, TV
sets, beamers, and other display devices in which the output device is
not sent line interlaced half pictures – unlike in the interlace technique
– but real full pictures.
PSK: Clients that wish to connect to a wireless network secured with
PSK must know this key.
R
Wired network: see LAN.
Wireless network: see WLAN.
WLAN: Abbreviation for Wireless Local Area Network. Also abbreviated as wireless network.
WMA: Abbreviation for Windows Media Audio, Microsoft own audio
data format. As with MP3 files, the content is compressed here as well.
WMV: Abbreviation for Windows Media Video, proprietary Microsoft
video data format.
RGB: Colour signals Red, Green and Blue.
WPA: Abbreviation for Wi-Fi Protected Access. Replaced WEP as
standard encryption for wireless networks.
Router: Device for connecting several networks, e.g., home network
and Internet.
Y
Ycc/Ypp: Colour standards for Set-top boxes..
S
Satellite tuner: Receiver for satellite programmes.
SDTV: Standard Definition TeleVision.
SECAM: French colour standard, stands for Séquentiel à mémoire.
Set-top box: Set-top box (STB for short) refers to a device in entertainment electronics which is connected to another device, usually a
TV set, and offers the user additional functional options.
Signal input group: Depending on the applied signal, the signal
sources are divided into different groups.
Signal strength: Strength of the received antenna signal.
Signal quality: Quality of the incoming antenna signal.
Smart Card: The Smart Card is an electronic chip card issued by the
respective programme provider or by the certification free Pay TV
operators. It contains the code which is decoded by the CA module.
YCbCr: Digital colour model, informally also incorrect designation
for signals in standard resolution (SDTV). The YCbCr colour model,
in which, e.g., DVDs are coded, has been developed from the YUV
colour model used in analogue television technology. With YCbCr, the
data is transferred via digital interfaces such as DVI or HDMI without
being converted.
YPbPr: Analogue colour model, see also Component connection.
The analogue YPbPr signal is generated from the YCbCr signal by a
converter in the source player and then output at the 3 component
outputs of the source player.
YUV: The YUV colour model is used for analogue television in accordance with the standards PAL and NTSC. YUV is often informally referred to when YPbPr (for analogue connections/cables) or YCbCr (in
digital applications) is actually meant. YUV only occurs in quadrature
modulation during PAL or NTSC transfer and is not otherwise used.
Static contrast ratio: Describes the difference between the brightest
and darkest picture display.
Stereo: Dual channel sound.
Switch: Device for connecting several computers to a network.
Switching voltage: Video devices supply this voltage to switch the
TV set to playback.
Symbol rate: Specifies the transmission speed for data transmission.
T
Terrestrial: In data transmission a wireless transmission that does
not use satellites as intermediate station is referred to as terrestrial.
TFT: Thin Film Transistor. One widely distributed application is control
of liquid crystal flat screens, for which a signal transistor is used for
each pixel. This design of display is also referred to as active matrix,
however it is frequently also referred to as TFT display.
Tuner: Another term for receiver.
U
Ultra HD: Ultra HD (abbr. for Ultra High Definition) is a digital highdefinition video format, which is about four times the resolution of
HDTV.
USB: Universal Serial Bus. Serial bus system for connecting external
devices (USB card reader, USB stick).
UPnP AV Is used to control network devices from all manufacturers.
Has become a widespread standard for home networking.
V
VGA: PC interface for connecting a monitor.
131
n Connect 32
User manual
EC Declaration of Conformity
Този уред отговаря на основните изисквания и разширените съответни предпоставки Директива 2014/53/ЕU. Във
Франция и Италия използването му е разрешено само в затворени помещения.
Toto zařízení je v souladu se základními požadavky a ostatními odpovídajícími ustanoveními Směrnice 2014/53/EU. Ve
Francii a v Italii je použití přístroje dovolené jenom v interiéru.
Dieses Gerät entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtlinie
2014/53/EU. In Frankreich und Italien ist die Nutzung nur in Innenräumen zulässig.
Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de væsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 2014/53/EU. I
Frankrig og Italien er det kun tilladt at anvende det indendørs.
Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales así como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 2014/53/EU. En Francia
e Italia, su uso está permitido únicamente en espacios interiores.
Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 2014/53/EU olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siinä asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien määräysten mukainen. Ranskassa ja Italiassa laitetta saa käyttää vain sisätiloissa.
Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la 2014/53/EU. En France et
en Italie l‘utilisation est autorisée uniquement dans des espaces fermés.
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. In
France and Italy it may only be used indoors.
Αυτός ο εξοπλισµός είναι σε συµµόρφωση µε τις ουσιώδεις απαιτήσεις και άλλες σχετικές διατάξεις της Οδηγίας 2014/53/EU.
Στην Γαλλία και στην Ιταλία επιτρέπεται η χρήση μόνο σε εσωτερικούς χώρους.
Questo apparato é conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 2014/53/EU. In Francia e in
Italia è consentito l‘uso solo in ambienti chiusi.
Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 2014/53/EU. I
Frankrike og Italia er kun innendørs bruk tillatt.
Dit apparaat voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 2014/53/EU. In
Frankrijk en Italië is het gebruik slechts binnenshuis toegestaan.
Este aparelho está em conformidade com os requisitos fundamentais e todas as restantes disposições da Diretiva 2014/53/
EU. Em França e Itália a sua utilização apenas é permitida em espaços interiores.
Denna utrustning är i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestämmelser i Direktiv 2014/53/EU.
I Frankrike och Italien får apparaten användas endast inomhus.
132
„ Connect 32
User manual
Index
A
Access code .................................................................................... 84
Adding stations to personal list ...................................................... 80
Additional functions for DR+ archive playback ............................. 58
Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier .....................................................104
Adjusting the sound .........................................................................74
Adjust size of the PIP image ........................................................... 92
Allow switching voltage ..................................................................105
Antenna DVB .................................................................... 71, 101, 105
Antenna DVB-S ..............................................................................105
Antenna DVB-T ...............................................................................105
ARC ................................................................................................. 115
Archive recording ............................................................................ 43
Artist Search ................................................................................... 65
Audio commentary ......................................................................... 92
AUDIO key .......................................................................................117
Audio playback
Playback ....................................................................................... 62
Audio playback from external devices .......................................... 116
Audio/Radio .............................................................................. 30, 61
Audio return channel ..................................................................... 115
Auto dimming ................................................................................... 71
Auto dimming - Room .....................................................................72
Auto format (AMD) ..........................................................................72
Automatic menu info ....................................................................... 17
Automatic rotate ............................................................................. 66
Automatic scan TV+Radio ........................................................ 71, 75
Automatic shutdown .........................................................................7
Automatic time control ................................................................... 53
Auto volume ..................................................................................... 71
AV connecting settings .................................................... 71, 101, 105
AV list ............................................................................................... 34
AV output signal ............................................................................... 71
B
Balance ....................................................................................... 71, 74
Batteries ........................................................................................... 12
Blu-ray player .................................................................................. 111
Bookmarks
Delete ........................................................................................... 59
Delete individual ones ................................................................. 59
Jump ............................................................................................ 58
Set ..........................................................................................43, 58
Brightness ..................................................................................71, 72
Browser ............................................................................................ 70
C
Cable fixing ........................................................................................11
Camcorder ...................................................................................... 111
CA modul ........................................................................................109
Change title of an archive recording .............................................. 46
Changing the station list .................................................................. 31
Character table ................................................................................ 16
CI slot ..............................................................................................109
Cleaning and care ..............................................................................7
Clear data base ............................................................................... 83
Clock display .................................................................................... 17
Code number .................................................................................. 84
Color intensity .................................................................................. 71
Coloured keys .................................................................................. 38
Colour intensity ................................................................................72
Colour temperature ...................................................................71, 72
Common Interface Plus .................................................................109
Component connection ................................................................ 114
Compose / edit Personal list .......................................................... 80
Connecting antennas .......................................................................11
Connecting HiFi/AV amplifier ........................................................ 115
Connecting home network .............................................................. 12
Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) ........................... 115
Connecting the TV set ......................................................................11
Connections ............................................................................... 10, 71
Contrast ......................................................................................71, 72
Control .............................................................................................. 71
Create new personal list ................................................................. 80
Crossover ........................................................................................ 66
D
Data capture .................................................................................... 83
Deblocking filter .........................................................................71, 72
Delete
Bookmarks .................................................................................. 59
individual bookmarks .................................................................. 59
Recording ..................................................................................... 46
Delete manager
Set delete protection for timer recording .................................. 53
Delete personal list ......................................................................... 80
Deleting blocks .................................................................................79
Deleting stations from the personal list ........................................ 80
Devices on AV ................................................................................. 113
Digital Link ........................................................................ 71, 101, 106
Digital Link HD ................................................................................ 112
Digital Link HD functionality ..........................................................106
Digital Noise Control (DNC) ......................................................71, 72
Direct recording .............................................................................. 43
Display .............................................................................................. 13
DR+ .............................................................................................71, 93
DR+ archive ..................................................................................... 45
DR+ Streaming ...........................................................................49, 71
Notify started „Follow me“ recording ........................................ 94
DR+ Streaming settings ................................................................. 93
Also use other archives ............................................................... 94
DR+ device group name ............................................................. 94
DR+ device name ........................................................................ 94
IP port number ............................................................................ 94
DVB character set ........................................................................... 92
DVB settings ...............................................................................71, 92
DVD player ....................................................................................... 111
133
„ Connect 32
User manual
Index
E
L
Edit new personal list ...................................................................... 80
Edit personal list .............................................................................. 80
Energy efficiency ..................................................................18, 71, 85
Environment ................................................................................... 127
EPG .............................................................................................35, 71
Explanation of keys .......................................................................... 17
Explanation of symbols ................................................................... 17
Export archive entries ......................................................................47
Export log file ..............................................................................71, 96
Extras ........................................................................................ 71, 107
Language ..................................................................... 18, 71, 83, 120
Licence agreement .......................................................................... 18
LNC/LNB .............................................................................23, 25, 26
Loudness .................................................................................... 71, 74
F
Favourites ........................................................................................ 30
Film quality improvement (DMM) ............................................71, 72
FLOF ................................................................................................. 38
Follow-Me function ................................................................... 49, 55
Function list ..................................................................................... 34
Function of the TEXT key ................................................................ 95
G
Game console .........................................................................106, 111
Gaming mode ................................................................... 71, 101, 106
Gamma brightness correction ........................................................72
General information on menu operation ........................................ 14
H
Hard disks ...................................................................................71, 95
Formatting ................................................................................... 95
HbbTV .................................................................................. 40, 71, 95
HbbTV-Modus ................................................................................. 95
HbbTV text ...................................................................................... 40
HDMI ................................................................................................ 111
HDMI CEC ....................................................................................... 112
Headphone volume ........................................................................ 34
History ............................................................................................. 32
Home ............................................................................................... 30
Home networking systems ........................................................... 116
Home view ....................................................................................... 30
I
Image+ Active ............................................................................71, 72
Initial installation wizard .................................................................. 18
Installing the TV set ..........................................................................11
Instant Channel Zapping ................................................................. 31
Instant recording ............................................................................. 43
Integrated features ...........................................................71, 107, 108
Interval functions ............................................................................ 59
Deleting part of the recording .................................................... 60
Hide .............................................................................................. 59
J
Jump ................................................................................................ 56
Jump distance ................................................................................. 93
Jumping to Bookmarks .................................................................. 58
134
M
Mains switch .................................................................................9, 13
Manual scan TV ................................................................................75
Manuell scan (incl. antenna status) ................................................ 71
Maximum switch on volume ........................................................... 71
Maximum volume ...................................................................... 71, 74
MediaNet ......................................................................................... 68
Browse ......................................................................................... 69
Exit ................................................................................................ 68
Settings ........................................................................................ 69
Mobile phone keyboard ................................................................... 16
Move block .......................................................................................79
Move picture up/down ...............................................................71, 72
Move stations in the personal list .................................................. 80
Moving of archive entries ................................................................47
Multimedia / Network ..................................................................... 71
Multimedia settings .................................................................71, 100
Multi select ...................................................................................... 46
Music playback
end ............................................................................................... 63
Repeat .......................................................................................... 63
Shuffle playback .......................................................................... 63
Winding ........................................................................................ 62
N
Networking .......................................................................................97
Network selection ..................................................................... 20, 21
Network settings ........................................................................71, 97
Notify hidden sections .................................................................... 93
Numerical keys ........................................................................... 14, 31
O
One touch recording ....................................................................... 43
On/Off button .....................................................................................9
On-screen displays .................................................................... 71, 91
OPC ...................................................................................................72
P
Page selection ................................................................................. 38
Parental lock ........................................................................ 48, 71, 84
PC .................................................................................................... 113
PC IN - Display ..................................................................................72
Permanent clock display ................................................................. 17
Personal list ..................................................................................... 32
Add station .................................................................................. 80
Create new list ............................................................................. 80
Delete list ..................................................................................... 80
Delete station .............................................................................. 80
Move station ................................................................................ 80
Rename list .................................................................................. 80
„ Connect 32
User manual
Index
Photo ..........................................................................................30, 66
Exit .................................................................................................67
Full-screen mode ..........................................................................67
Rotate photo .................................................................................67
Slide show .....................................................................................67
Picture ............................................................................................... 71
Picture adjustment ..............................................................71, 72, 73
Picture format ......................................................................71, 72, 73
4:3 .................................................................................................73
16:9 ................................................................................................73
PALplus .........................................................................................73
Panorama .....................................................................................73
Zoom .............................................................................................73
Picture settings ................................................................................72
PIP ............................................................................................... 41, 71
PIP Settings ..................................................................................... 92
Positioning/aligning the DVB-T antenna ......................................105
Post-record time ............................................................................. 93
Pre-record time ............................................................................... 93
Proxy server ............................................................................... 97, 99
Q
Quick start mode .......................................................................71, 85
R
Radio mode ...............................................................................64, 65
Record conflict ................................................................................. 51
Recording ........................................................................................ 93
Remote control .................................................................... 8, 12, 117
Remote TV switch on of the TV set ..............................................106
Renaming the HDMI port designation ........................................... 111
Renaming the personal list ............................................................. 80
Renderer ...................................................................................71, 100
Repeat initial installation .................................................... 18, 71, 107
Reset to factory settings .................................................71, 107, 108
Restore stations ...............................................................................79
S
Safety ............................................................................................. 6, 7
Satellite selection ......................................................... 23, 24, 25, 26
Satellite system ............................................................................... 22
Scope of delivery ................................................................................5
Scrambled stations ............................................... 20, 21, 27, 76, 110
Search for artists ............................................................................ 65
Selecting a station out of the station list ........................................ 31
Select station ................................................................................... 31
using the numerical keys ............................................................. 31
via personal lists .......................................................................... 32
with P+/P- .................................................................................... 31
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12) ................................................... 116
Serial recording tolerance .............................................................. 93
Service ............................................................................................ 137
Set covers ..........................................................................................11
Setting the volume ........................................................................... 31
Set-top box ...................................................................................... 111
Sharpness ..................................................................................71, 72
Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button ...................................106
Signal type ......................................................................................105
Skin tone .....................................................................................71, 72
Slide show speed ............................................................................ 66
Smart Card .....................................................................................109
Smart jump ...............................................................................56, 93
Software ............................................................................................ 71
Software download ......................................................................... 86
Software update
Automatic update via the internet ............................................. 90
Manually via Antenna .................................................................. 88
Via Antenna ................................................................................. 89
Via USB memory medium ..........................................................87
Sound .......................................................................................... 71, 74
Sound adjustment ..................................................................... 71, 74
Sound components ..................................................71, 101, 102, 115
Sound picture synchronisation ....................................................... 71
Sources ............................................................................................ 30
Standard Teletext ............................................................................. 71
Standby mode .................................................................................. 13
Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations ............................................... 95
Station lists Radio ................................................................71, 75, 79
Station lists TV .....................................................................71, 75, 79
Stations ....................................................................................... 71, 75
Station search ................................................................................. 65
Status display .................................................................................. 33
STB key ............................................................................................117
Stop recording early ....................................................................... 44
Subtitle .........................................................................44, 60, 92, 93
Supply voltage 5V ..........................................................................105
Switching off the TV set during recording ..................................... 44
Switch off .......................................................................................... 13
Switch on .......................................................................................... 13
Switch-on volume ............................................................................74
Switch to live picture ....................................................................... 42
System settings ........................................................................ 30, 71
T
Teletext ............................................................................................ 38
Time and date ............................................................................ 71, 91
Time display ..................................................................................... 17
Timer ................................................................................................ 50
Timer list ...................................................................................... 50
Timer Services ............................................................................ 53
Timer data ....................................................................................... 52
Automatic time control ............................................................... 53
Beginning ..................................................................................... 52
Date .............................................................................................. 52
Delete protection ......................................................................... 53
End ............................................................................................... 52
Favourite ...................................................................................... 53
Folder ........................................................................................... 52
Lock recording ............................................................................. 53
Recording subtitles ..................................................................... 53
Recording type ............................................................................ 52
Station .......................................................................................... 52
Timer Services ................................................................................ 50
Time shift ......................................................................................... 42
TOP .................................................................................................. 38
135
„ Connect 32
User manual
Index
Transfer all station lists .............................................................. 71, 75
TV ............................................................................................... 30, 31
TV key ........................................................................................12, 117
TV on when memorised ................................................................. 83
TV viewing with time shift ........................................................42, 43
U
Update station list automatically .............................................. 71, 75
UPnP ................................................................................................. 12
USB stick ......................................................................................... 86
V
Value-added service ...................................................................8, 40
VESA standard ...............................................................................126
Video ..........................................................................................30, 54
VIDEO key ........................................................................................117
Video playback
Change picture format ................................................................ 58
Jump by entering a time ............................................................. 56
Playback ....................................................................................... 55
Repeat ...........................................................................................57
Selecting language/sound .......................................................... 58
Winding .........................................................................................57
Viewing a locked movie .................................................................. 48
Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording 43
Volume adjustment ......................................................................... 71
W
Wake on LAN/WiFi ...........................................................................97
Watching other stations during archive recording ....................... 43
Web ............................................................................................30, 68
WEB key function .......................................................................71, 96
Y
YPbPr .............................................................................................. 114
YUV ................................................................................................. 114
136
n Connect 32
User manual
Service
Qualifi Pty Ltd
24 Lionel Road
Mt.Waverley VIC 3149 Australia
Tel +61-03-8542 1111
Fax +61-03-9543 3677
E-mail: info@qualifi.com.au
Gaplasa S.A.
Conde de Torroja, 25
28022 Madrid, España
Tel +34 - 917 48 29 60
Fax +34 - 913 29 16 75
E-mail: loewe@maygap.com
Loewe Opta Benelux NV/SA
Uilenbaan 84
2160 Wommelgem, België
Tel +32 - 3 - 2 70 99 30
Fax +32 - 3 - 235 48 37
E-mail: ccc@loewe.be
Loewe France SAS
Rue du Dépôt,
13 Parc de l l‘Europe, BP 10010
67014 Strasbourg Cédex, France
Tel +33 - 3- 88 79 72 50
Fax +33 - 3- 88 79 72 59
E-mail: loewe.france@loewe-fr.com
Telion AG
Rütistrasse 26
8952 Schlieren, Schweiz
Tel +41 - 44 732 15 11
Fax +41 - 44 732 15 02
E-mail: infoKD@telion.ch
GuoGuang Electric Co., Ltd.
No. 8 Jinghu Road, Xinya St, Huadu Reg.
GZ, PRC
Tel +86-(0)20-22675744
Fax +86-(0)20-22675744
E-mail:service@loewe-chn.com
Hadjikyriakos & Sons Ltd.
121 Prodromos Str., P.O Box 21587
1511 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel +357 - 22 87 21 11
Fax +357 - 22 66 33 91
E-mail: service@hadjikyriakos.com.cy
BaSys CS s.r.o.
Sodomkova 1478/8
10200 Praha 10 - Hostivar,
Česká republika
Tel +420 234 706 700
Fax +420 234 706 701
E-mail: office@basys.cz
Loewe Technologies GmbH,
Customer Care Center
Industriestraße 11
96317 Kronach, Deutschland
Tel +49 9261 99-500
Fax +49 9261 99-515
E-mail: ccc@loewe.de
www.loewe-friends.de
EET Europarts
Loewe Denmark
Bregnerødvej 133 D
3460 Birkerød, Denmark
Tel +45 45 82 19 19
E-mail: info@eeteuroparts.dk
EET Europarts
Loewe Finland
Metsänneidonkuja 12
02130 Espoo, Finland
Tel +358 9 47 850 900
www.eeteuroparts.fi
Loewe UK Ltd
PO Box 220
Eastbourne
BN24 9GQ
UK
Tel +44 (0)333 123 0220
E-mail: enquiries@loewe-uk.com
Issagogiki Emboriki Ellados S.A.
321 Mesogion Av.
152 31 Chalandri-Athens, Hellas
Tel +30 - 210 672 12 00
Fax +30 - 210 674 02 04
E-mail: christina_argyropoulou@
isembel.gr
Plug&Play Ltd.
Bednjanska 8, 10000 Zagreb
Hrvatska (Kroatia)
Tel +385 1 4929 683
Fax +385 1 4929 682
E-mail: info@loewe.hr
Loewe Italiana S.r.L.
Via Monte Baldo 14/P
37069 D
ossobuono di Villafranca di
Verona
Tel +39 - 045 82 51 690
Fax +39 - 045 82 51 622
E-mail: info@loewe.it
T. R. Electro Stereo Ltd.
Yad Harutzim 9
6770002 Tel Aviv
Israel
Tel +972 – 3 – 6091100
Fax +972 – 3 – 6092200
E-Mail: info@loewe.co.il
Nonplus Ultra Home Automation Pvt Ltd
First Floor, No. 615, Second Main Road
Indiranagar Stage I, Indiranagar
Bangalore 560038
India
Tel +91 80 41114599
E-mail: jimmy@nplusultra.in
Pars Royal Taramesh
LOEWE
#18 Elahiye St. bidar AVE.
Unit #1
Postal code : 1965915651
Tehran, Iran
Tel +98 21-22010298
E-Mail: info@tarameshgroup.com
JOR
ACCU-TECH Solutions Co.
1-Kharija Al-Ashja‘i Street
Jabal Al-Weibdeh
P.O.Box 9668 Amman 11191, Jordan
Tel: +962-6-465-9985
Fax: +962-6-465-0119
E-Mail: info@accutech-solutions.net
LOEWE Show Room
Olaya Street,
Near Kingdom Center Riyadh,
Saudi Arabia
P.O Box 92831, Riyadh 11663
Tel + 966-11-4640927
Fax +966-11-4640759
Email: hagop@sas-se.com
Mr. Hagop Julmekian
Dominterior SIA
A.Čaka iela 80
Rīga, LV-1011, Latvia
Tel +3 71 - 67 29 29 59
Fax +3 71 - 67 31 05 68
E-Mail: konstantin.golubev@loewe.lv
A Cappella Ltd.
Ausros Vartu 5, Pasazo skg.
01129 Vilnius, Lithuania
Tel +370 - 52 12 22 96
Fax +370 - 52 62 66 81
E-mail: info@loewe.lt
EET Europarts AS
Olaf Helsetsvei 6 (Vekstsenteret)
0694 Oslo, Norge
Tel +47 - 22919500
E-mail: salg@eeteuroparts.no
Gaplasa S.A.
Parque Suécia
Avda. do Forte, 3
Edificio Suécia I piso 1-2.07
2790-073 CARNAXIDE, Portugal
Tel +351 - 21 942 78 30
Fax +351 - 21 940 00 78
E-mail: geral.loewe@mayro.pt
3LOGIC Sp.z o.o.
ul. Zakopiańska 153
30-435 Kraków
Tel +48 - 12 640 20 00
Fax +48 - 12 640 20 01
www.3logic.pl
V2 Indonesia
5th Intiland tower
Jl. Jenderal Sudirman 32
Jakarta 10220, INDONESIA
Tel +62-21 57853547
E-mail: service@v2indonesia.com
I Control SAL
Gemmaizeh, Rmeil.
Building 328 1st Floor Beirut, Lebanon
Tel +961 1 446777 / 1 587446
Fax +961 1 582446
E-mail: info@icontrol-leb.com
Service Center Loewe
Aptekarsky per.4 podjezd 5A
105005 Moscow, Russia
Tel +7 - 499 940 42 32 ( ext. 454 )
Fax +7 - 495 730 78 01
E-mail: service@loewe-cis.ru
EET Europarts AB
Loewe Sweden
Box 4124
SE-131 04, Nacka, Sverige
Tel +46 - 8 507 510 00
E-mail: Kundservice@eeteuroparts.se
Atlas Care Centre
11 changi south street 3
#03-01 builders centre
Singapore 486122
Tel +65 - 6745 2028
Fax +65 - 6546 7861
E-mail: service@atlas-sv.com
ENKAY GROUP
SERVISPLUS MUSTERI HIZMETLERI
Alemdag Cad. Site Yolu No:18
Umraniye, Istanbul, TÜRKIYE
Tel 444 4 784
E-mail: info@servisplus.com.tr
Volco Enterprise Close Corporation
Unit 8
7 on Mastiff (Road)
Longlake Ext 1, Lingbro Business Park
2165 Johannesburg
Tel +27 11 608 1228
Fax +27 11 608 1740
E-mail: service@volco.co.za
© by Loewe Technologies 19.06.17
137
„ Connect 32
User manual
Code page
STB
ABSAT
AEGIR
AIWA
AKAI
ALBA
166, 169
179
141
033, 104
060, 017, 067, 104,
111, 126, 180, 201
ALCATEL
336
ALDES
133, 168, 179, 201
ALLSAT
033, 048, 059, 077, 201
ALLSONIC
133, 168, 226
ALLTECH
060, 137, 225
ALPHA
033
ALTAI
047
AMITRONICA
060
AMPERE
047, 186, 207
AMSTRAD
060, 006, 047, 071, 097,
132, 165, 174, 175, 186,
212, 216, 217, 227, 228
ANGLO
060
ANKARO
060, 051, 133,
161, 162, 168, 226
ANTTRON
017, 077, 180
APOLLO
017
ARCON
025, 051, 079, 132, 136, 161
ARMSTRONG
033, 175
ARTHUR MARTIN
130
ASA
009
ASAT
025, 033
ASLF
060
AST
127, 194
ASTACOM
171, 172
ASTON
032, 095
ASTRA
013, 021, 025, 098, 099
164, 175, 178, 190, 222, 223
ASTRO
006, 091, 094, 176,
177, 179, 180, 181
AUDIOTON
059, 180
AUSTAR
212, 332
AVALON
047
AXIS
054, 210, 223, 226
BARCOM
021, 051
BEKO
067
BEST
051, 226
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
343
BLAUPUNKT
090, 176
BLUE SKY
060, 217
BOCA
163, 169, 175, 186,
199, 207, 222
BRAIN WAVE
094, 161
BRANDT
069
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
050, 227
BRITISH TELECOM
341
BROADCAST
013
BROCO
060, 223
BRUNS
133
BSKYB
227
BT
104, 171, 172, 229, 335
BT SATELLITE
171
BUBU SAT
060
BUSH
048, 077, 106, 126
BVV
161
CABLETIME
308, 311, 312, 333, 334
CAMBRIDGE
006, 104, 199
CANAL
019
CANAL DIGITAL
128
CANAL PLUS
128, 019, 320, 321
CANAL SATELLITE
128, 191, 211
CANARY
137
CARAT.SOM
054
CHAPARRAL
012, 134
CHESS
197
CITYCOM
135, 164, 203, 204, 230
CLARK
180
CLATRONIC
094
CLEMENS KAMPHUS
133, 210
CLYDE CABLE VISION
317
CNT
179
COMCAST
004
COMCRYPT
320, 321
COMMANDER
161, 162
COMMLINK
168
COMMUNICADO
054
COMTEC
054, 168
138
CONDOR
164, 226
CONNEXIONS
047, 096, 226, 231
CONRAD 006, 010, 164, 169, 226, 230
CONTEC
054, 135, 169
COSAT
059
CROWN
175
CRYPTOVISION
067, 315
CYBERMAXX
116
CYRUS
037
DAERYUNG
047
DAEWOO
060, 017, 025
DANSAT
048, 077
DAUMLING
163
D-BOX
045, 214
DECCA
038
DECSAT
310
DECSAT CANAL
310
DELFA
212
DEUTSCHE TELEKOM
056
DEW
025, 054
DIAMOND
225
DIRECTV
144
DISCOVERER
197
DISEQC
171, 172
DISK EXPRESS
051
DISMOND
225
DISTRATEL 119, 146, 147, 149, 185, 217
DISTRISAT
033, 059
DNR
161
DNT
033, 037, 047, 231
DRAKE
029
DST
017
DUAL
025
DUNE
226
DYNASAT
196
ECHOSTAR
060, 021, 047, 086,
088, 128, 211, 213
EIF
014, 198
EINHELL
060, 006, 017, 097, 163,
168, 169, 175, 186, 222
ELEKTA
179
ELSAT
071
ELTA
017, 033, 059, 226
ELTASAT
059
EMANON
017
EMME ESSE
133, 213, 226
ENGEL
060
EP SAT
067
EURIEULT
185, 217
EUROCRYPT
021, 067
EURODEC
110, 232
EUROPA
006, 033, 161,
162, 164, 169, 212
EUROPEAN
163
EUROSAT
175, 225
EUROSKY
164, 175, 186, 226
EUROSTAR
164, 215, 233, 234
EUTRA
137, 203
EXATOR
017, 104, 180
FAGOR
059
FERGUSON
023, 048, 067, 077,
106, 108, 111, 124, 206
FIDELITY
006, 071, 097
FILMNET
318
FINLANDIA
021, 067
FINLUX
009, 010, 021, 067, 220
FINNSAT
110
FLAIR MATE
060
FORCE
068
FOXTEL
235, 022, 319
FRACARRO
017, 087, 196, 213
FRANCE TELECOM
344
FREECOM
017, 193, 201
FREESAT
137
FTE
060, 080, 136, 137, 169,
196, 199, 212, 226
FUBA
010, 014, 017, 021, 047,
051, 088, 135, 176, 220, 226
G SAT
077, 130
GALAXI
051
GALAXIS
054, 059, 133, 161, 168,
209, 210, 211, 212, 223,
226, 236, 237, 238
GALAXISAT
127
GARDINER
204
GEC
317
GENIX
024
GENERAL-INSTRUMENTS
332
GIUCAR RECORD
089
GMI
175
GOLDBOX
128, 191, 211
GOODMANS
067, 111
GRAETZ
088, 099
GRANADA
021, 099
GRANDIN
185, 239
GROTHUSEN
017, 193
GRUNDIG
026, 003, 067, 090, 097,
171, 172, 176, 217, 227,
240, 241, 242, 020, 307, 316
HANSEATIC
197
HANTOR
017, 094
HANURI
179
HARTING UND HELLING
133
HASE & IGEL
161
HELIOCOM
164
HIGH PERFORMANCE
085, 122
HINARI
017, 077
HIRSCHMANCE
090
HIRSCHMANN 006, 009, 010, 047, 081,
113, 133, 171, 172, 176,
196, 203, 216, 219, 243
HISAWA
094
HITACHI
067, 106, 111, 120
HNE
165
HOUSTON
059, 071, 161, 162, 171
HUMAX
212, 236, 244, 005
HUTH
013, 054, 059, 094, 133,
136, 161, 162, 163, 164,
168, 169, 175, 186
HYPERVISION
345
ICX
138
IKUSI ALLSAT
136
IMEX
185
IMPERIAL
126
INGELEN
088, 099
INNOVATION
116
INTERNATIONAL
186
INTERTRONIC
175
INTERVISION
042, 059, 164, 170
INVIDEO
213
ITALTEL
213
ITT
021, 067, 088, 099, 120, 123
ITT NOKIA
009, 010, 021, 067, 088,
099, 120, 123, 214
JEEMON
059
JERROLD
138, 330, 332, 341, 343
JOHANSSON
059, 094
JOK
171, 172, 200, 229
JSR
059
JVC
003, 104
KABELVISION
330
KAMM
060, 215
KATHREIN
060, 033, 037, 080, 081,
090, 091, 094, 096, 112,
114, 135, 166, 176, 180,
196, 204, 218, 245, 246
KEY WEST
163
KOLON
017
KONIG
164
KOSCOM
210
KOSMOS
080, 081, 133, 193
KR
059, 137, 180, 203
KREISELMEYER
176
K-SAT
060
KYOSTAR
017, 180
KYOTO GMI ATLAN
143
L&S ELECTRONIC
226
LASAT
054, 164, 175, 179,
186, 199, 222, 226
LEMON
161, 162, 247
LENCO
060, 017, 025, 079, 161,
162, 164, 193, 221, 223, 226
LENNOX
042, 059
LENSON
006
LEXUS
033
LEYCO
104
LG (GOLDSTAR)
079, 107, 193
LIFESAT
197, 226
LIFETEX
116
LOKIA
088
LORENZEN 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 186
LORRAINE
193
LUPUS
226
LUXOR
006, 010, 021, 088, 097,
099, 120, 123, 130, 214
LYONNAISE
110
M&B1
197
MACAB
225, 232, 248, 329
MAGAI
080
MANATA
060, 171, 172
MANHATTAN
042, 059, 067, 106,
111, 151, 171, 172,
179, 210, 221
MARANTZ
033, 037
MASCOM
081
MASPRO
060, 026, 003, 093, 096,
106, 108, 113, 137, 161,
176, 242
MASTER_S
135
MATSUI
003, 109, 171, 172, 176
MAX
164
MB
197
MEDIABOX
191, 211
MEDIAMARKT
175
MEDIASAT
006, 128, 191, 211, 223
MEDION
060, 226
MEDISON
060
MEGA
033
MELECTRONIC
204
MEMPHIS
054, 134
METRONIC
060, 017, 117, 119, 121,
131, 146, 147, 149, 151,
152, 153, 154, 156, 157,
168, 175, 179, 180, 185,
204, 217
METZ
090, 176
MICRO
164, 180
MICRO ELECTRONIC
060
MICRO MAXX
116
MICRO STAR
116
MICRO TEC
060
MICRO TECHNOLOGY
060, 190, 223
MICRONIK
249
MINERVA
003, 090
MITSUBISHI
067, 090
MITSUMI
222
MNET
320, 321, 342
MORGAN
060, 033, 059, 132, 163,
169, 175, 186, 199, 207,
222, 250
MOVIE TIME
328
MR ZAPP
329
MULTICHOICE
100, 235
MULTISTAR
080
MURATTO
127, 193
MYRYAD
037
MYSAT
060
NAVEX
094
NEC
030, 073
NEIRU
079
NETA P
140
NETWORK
077
NEUHAUS
060, 006, 059, 161,
162, 164, 169, 210, 223,
NEUSAT
060, 161, 210
NEXTWAVE
138
NIKKO
060, 175, 201
NOKIA
009, 010, 021, 045, 067,
088, 099, 105, 120, 123,
211, 214, 242, 251, 346
NOMEX
221
NOOS
329
NORCO
221
NORDMENDE
017, 067, 179, 206
NOVIS
094
NSC
328
NTC
133, 203
NTL CABLETELL
332
OCEANIC
225
OCTAGON 017, 025, 054, 161, 162, 180
OKANO
080, 133, 175
OLYMPIC
133
ONDIGITAL
187, 188, 189
ONO
301
OPTEX
059, 135, 196, 208
„ Connect 32
User manual
Code page
OPTIMA
133
OPTUS
332
ORBIT
025, 194
ORBITECH 006, 017, 103, 169, 181, 224
ORIGO
126, 221
OSAT
097
OTTO VERSAND
090
OXFORD
104
PACE
001, 022, 044, 048, 050,
067, 077, 098, 108, 124,
189, 202, 227, 242, 252,
253, 319, 347
PACIFIC
225
PACKSAT
171, 172
PALCOM
092
PALLADIUM
003, 006, 017, 175
PALSAT
006
PANASAT
235, 254
PANASONIC
031, 067, 124, 227
PANDA
021, 048, 067, 164, 176, 210
PATRIOT
104
PHILIPS
026, 003, 033, 037, 051,
067, 077, 124, 128, 144,
156, 161, 162, 169, 171,
172, 176, 180, 187, 188,
191, 204, 211, 218, 229,
242, 313, 323, 329, 345
PHOENIX
054, 077
PHONOTREND
042, 059, 133,
142, 168, 212
PIONEER
128, 191, 211, 302
PIXX
255
PLANET
126, 213
POLSAT
110
POLYTRON
047, 135
PREDKI
017, 094
PREISNER
047, 103, 163, 169,
175, 186, 199, 222
PREMIER
059, 133
PREMIERE
191, 211, 214, 007
PROMAX
067
PROSAT
168, 170
PROSONIC
165
PROTEK
225
PROVISAT
201
PROVISION
179
PVP STEREO VISUAL
330
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
341
PYE
003
PYXIS
208, 210
QUADRAL
168, 169, 170,
171, 172, 173, 226
QUELLE
090, 097, 164, 165
QUIERO
110
RADIOLA
033, 037
RADIX
047, 137, 216
RAINBOW
137, 180
RC
138
RC-1000
104
RED STAR
226
REDPOINT
223
REDSTAR
226
RFT
033, 037, 161, 162, 168, 224
ROADSTAR
060
ROVER
060, 170
SABA
077, 108, 161, 164,
171, 172, 179, 200,
201, 206, 217, 229
SABRE
067
SAGEM
205, 329
SAKURA
054, 057
SALORA
021, 088, 099, 120, 130, 303
SAMSUNG
017, 080, 127, 132,
211, 243, 302, 324
SAT
006, 071, 127, 194
SAT PARTNER
017, 094, 133,
179, 180, 193, 201
SAT TEAM
060
SATBOX
304
SATCOM
013, 164, 197
SATEC
060, 077, 242
SATECO
017
SATELCO
226
SATFORD
013
SATLINE
170
SATMASTER
SATPARTNER
013
017, 079, 094, 133, 179,
180, 193, 201
SATSTATION
151
SAVA
077, 108, 161, 164, 171,
172, 179, 200, 201, 206, 217
SCHACKE
180
SCHAUB LORENZ
088, 099
SCHNEIDER
171, 172, 218
SCHWAIGER
077, 114, 135, 161, 164,
169, 197, 217, 255
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 305, 306, 325, 326
SEDEA-ELECTRONIQUE
017
SEEMANN
047, 104, 175, 223
SEG
017, 094, 165,
178, 190, 197, 226
SELECO
059, 213
SEPTIMO
146, 151, 154
SERVI SAT
059
SIEMENS
090, 176, 199
SILVA
079, 193
SINTRACK
013
SKANTIN
060
SKARDIN
223
SKINSAT
006
SKR
060
SKY
034, 050, 189, 227, 001
SKY MASTER
060, 133, 168,
170, 197, 215
SKY PLUS
002
SKYLAB
051
SKYMAX
033
SKYSAT
197
SKYVISION
059
SL
161, 165, 175, 186
SM ELECTRONIC
060
SMART
186
SONY
067, 211, 227
SR
222
STARLAND
060
STARRING
094
STARSAT
080
STRONG
017, 025, 179, 180, 186,
196, 211, 226, 235
STS
328
STV
014
STVI
014, 137
SUMIDA
175
SUNNY SOUND
226
SUNSAT
060, 223
SUNSTAR
163, 175, 186, 222, 226
SUPERCABLE
343
SUPERNOVA
189
TAGRA
059
TANDBERG
008
TANDY
085, 122
TANTEC
067, 108
TATUNG
067
TCM
116
TECHNILAND
013, 059
TECHNISAT
006, 028, 033, 047, 102
103, 181, 184, 224, 231
TECHNOWELT
164
TECO
025, 175, 222
TELASAT
164, 197
TELECIEL
180, 201
TELECOM
060
TELEDIREKT
077
TELEFUNKEN
017, 083, 171 , 172
TELEKA
026, 006, 047, 081, 103,
180, 161, 164, 175, 203, 210
TELEMASTER
179
TELEMAX
018
TELEPIU
320, 321
TELE PLUS ONE
320, 321
TELESAT
164, 197
TELESERVICE
311, 314
TELESTAR
006
TELETECH
215
TELEVES
006, 067
TELEWIRE
059
TENSAI
025, 094
TEVION
116
THOMSON
060, 049, 067, 128,
155, 164, 171, 172,
191, 205, 206, 211
225
067
023, 048, 067
135, 175
059
033
060, 006, 013,
059, 067, 171, 210
TOPFIELD
011
TORX
341
TOSHIBA
067, 145
TPS
129, 205
TRENDLINE
222
TRENDPLAIN
222
TRGRA
088
TRIAD
085, 101, 127, 193, 194
TRIASAT
006, 220
TRIAX
060, 006, 033,
047, 211, 220, 230
TRISTAR
025
TUDI
327
TWINNER
115, 119
UNIDEN
058, 071, 080, 148, 208
UNISAT
033, 054, 175
UNITED CABLE
330, 341
UNITOR
051, 094
UNIVERSUM
003, 009, 071,
164, 165, 176
VAIADIGITAL
078
VARIOSAT
176
VARIOSTAT
176
VECTOR
178
VENTANA
033, 037
VESTEL
165
VIASAT
016
VIDEOCRYPT
023
VIDEOTRON
331
VIDEOWAY
331
VIDIO WAY
015
VIPER
054
VIRGIN MEDIA
063
VISIOPASS
309, 313, 329
VISIOSAT
060, 194, 200
VIVA
161, 162
VORTEC
017, 082, 083, 132, 142
VTECH
127, 194, 200, 204
WELA
060, 163, 169, 186
WESTMINSTER
335
WETEKOM
006, 197, 207
WEWA
067
WIBO
175
WINERSAT
094
WINTERGARTEN
168
WISI
006, 047, 067, 088,
123, 127, 164, 169,
176, 194, 200, 210
WITTENBERG
071
WOLSEY
085, 122
WOORISAT
179
WORLD
094
WORLDSAT
171, 172
XCOM
169
XCOM MULTIMEDIA
046
XRYPTON
226
XSAT
060, 046, 166, 169
YES
189
ZAUNKONIG
161
ZEHNDER
051, 080, 114, 127, 135
165, 179, 204, 226, 255
ZENITH
034, 314
ZETA-TECHNOLOGY
033
ZODIAC
180
ZWERGNASE
163, 175
THORENS
THORN
THORN-FERGUSON
TIOKO
TLEWIRE
TOKAI
TONNA
139
„ Connect 32
User manual
Notes
140
„ Connect 32
User manual
Notes
141
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement